Kec r2020 Ece

Kongu Engineering College, Perundurai, Erode – 638060, India
KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE

(Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
PERUNDURAI ERODE – 638 060
TAMILNADU INDIA
REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM & SYLLABI - 2020

(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM AND
OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION)
(For the students admitted during 2020 - 2021 and onwards)
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING DEGREE

IN
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND

COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
BE- Electronics and Communication Engineering, Regulations 2020, Curriculum and Syllabi 1
INDEX
Page
Sl.No. CONTENTS
No.
1 VISION AND MISSION OF THE INSTITUTE 3
2 QUALITY POLICY 3
3 VISION AND MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT 3
4 PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) 3
5 PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs) 4
6 PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs) 5
7 REGULATIONS 2020 6
8 CURRICULUM BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE 27
9 CATEGORISATION OF COURSES 27
10 SCHEDULING OF COURSES 37
11 MAPPING OF COURSES WITH PROGRAM OUTCOMES 39
CURRICULUM OF BE – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

12 45
ENGINEERING
13 DETAILED SYLLABUS 51
KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE

PERUNDURAI ERODE – 638 060
(Autonomous)
INSTITUTE VISION
To be a centre of excellence for development and dissemination of knowledge in Applied Sciences,
Technology, Engineering and Management for the Nation and beyond.
INSTITUTE MISSION
We are committed to value based Education, Research and Consultancy in Engineering and Management
and to bring out technically competent, ethically strong and quality professionals to keep our Nation
ahead in the competitive knowledge intensive world.
QUALITY POLICY
We are committed to
 Provide value based quality education for the development of students as competent and
responsible citizens.
 Contribute to the nation and beyond through research and development
 Continuously improve our services
DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
VISION
To be a centre of excellence for development and dissemination of knowledge in Electronics and
Communication Engineering for the Nation and beyond
MISSION
Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering is committed to:
MS1: To impart industry and research based quality education for developing value based electronics
and communication engineers
MS2: To enrich the academic activities by continual improvement in the teaching learning process
MS3: To infuse confidence in the minds of students to develop as entrepreneurs
MS4: To develop expertise for consultancy activities by providing thrust for Industry Institute
Interaction
MS5: To endeavor for constant upgradation of technical expertise for producing competent
professionals to cater to the needs of the society and to meet the global challenges
PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

Graduate of Electronics and Communication programme will:
PEO1: Succeed in industry and higher education by applying knowledge of mathematics, science and
engineering principles
PEO2: Analyze, design and implement electronics based solutions to meet the real world problems, with
constant update of domain knowledge
PEO3: Demonstrate Soft skills, Professional and Ethical values and an aptitude for lifelong learning
needed for a successful professional career
MAPPING OF MISSION STATEMENTS (MS) WITH PEOs
MS\PEO PEO1 PEO2 PEO3

MS1 3 3 3
MS2 3 3 2
MS3 3 3 3
MS4 3 3 2
MS5 2 3 3
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

Graduates of Electronics and Communication Engineering will:
PO1 Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering
fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
PO2 Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics,
natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
PO3 Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the
information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities
with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6 The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice.
PO7 Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering
solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for
sustainable development.
PO8 Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms
of the engineering practice.
PO9 Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in
diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
PO10 Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and receive
clear instructions.
PO11 Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and
leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12 Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

Graduates of Electronics and Communication will:
PSO1 Products Development : Apply multidisciplinary knowledge and skills to develop products for
providing solutions for the real world problems in Industry, Agriculture, Healthcare,
Communication etc.
PSO2 Development of Entrepreneurship: Have an aptitude to take up the applied research to become
Entrepreneurs in Electronics and Communication Engineering by combining the skills of project
management and finance.
MAPPING OF PEOs WITH POs AND PSOs

PEO\PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
PEO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 - 2 2 2 1 2 3 1
PEO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 3
PEO3 - 1 2 - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial
KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE, PERUNDURAI, ERODE – 638060
(Autonomous)
REGULATIONS 2020
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM AND OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (BE) / BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY (BTech)

DEGREE PROGRAMMES
These regulations are applicable to all candidates admitted into BE/BTech Degree
programmes from the academic year 2020 – 2021 onwards.
1. DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATU

RE
In these Regulations, unless otherwise specified:
i. “University” means ANNA UNIVERSITY, Chennai.
ii. “College” means KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE.
iii. “Programme” means Bachelor of Engineering (BE) / Bachelor of Technology (BTech)

Degree programme
iv. “Branch” means specialization or discipline of BE/BTech Degree programme, like Civil
Engineering, Information Technology, etc.
v. “Course” means a Theory / Theory cum Practical / Practical course that is normally
studied in a semester like Mathematics, Physics etc.
vi. “Credit” means a numerical value allocated to each course to describe the candidate’s
workload required per week.
vii. “Grade” means the letter grade assigned to each course based on the marks range
specified.
viii. “Grade point” means a numerical value (0 to 10) allocated based on the grade assigned
to each course.
ix. “Principal” means Chairman, Academic Council of the College.
x. “Controller of Examinations” means authorized person who is responsible for all

examination related activities of the College.
xi. “Head of the Department” means Head of the Department concerned of the College.
2. PROGRAMMES AND BRANCHES OF STUDY
The following programmes and branches of study approved by Anna University, Chennai and
All India Council for Technical Education, New Delhi are offered by the College.
Programme Branch
Civil Engineering
Mechanical Engineering
Electronics and Communication Engineering
Computer Science and Engineering
BE Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering
Mechatronics Engineering
Automobile Engineering
Computer Science and Design
Chemical Engineering
Information Technology
BTech Food Technology
Artificial Intelligence and Data Science
Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning
3. ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
3.1 First Semester Admission
The candidates seeking admission to the first semester of the eight semester BE / BTech
Degree Programme:
Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination (10 + 2) in the academic stream
with Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry as three of the four subjects of study under
Part-III subjects of the study conducted by the Government of Tamil Nadu or any
examination of any other University or authority accepted by the Anna University,
Chennai as equivalent thereto.
(OR)
Should have passed the Higher Secondary Examination of Vocational stream
(Vocational groups in Engineering / Technology) as prescribed by the Government of
Tamil Nadu.
They should also satisfy other eligibility conditions as prescribed by the Anna
University, Chennai and Directorate of Technical Education, Chennai from time to time.
3.2 Lateral Entry Admission

The candidates who hold a Diploma in Engineering / Technology awarded by the State
Board of Technical Education, Tamilnadu or its equivalent are eligible to apply for
Lateral entry admission to the third semester of BE / BTech in relevant branches of
study.
(OR)
The candidates who hold a BSc degree (10+2+3 stream) with mathematics as one of the
subjects at the BSc level from a recognised University are eligible to apply for Lateral
entry admission to the third semester of BE / BTech. Such candidates shall undergo two
additional Engineering course(s) in the third and fourth semesters as prescribed by the
College.
They should satisfy other eligibility conditions prescribed by the Anna University,
Chennai and Directorate of Technical Education, Chennai from time to time.
4. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMES
4.1 Categorisation of Courses
The BE / BTech programme shall have a curriculum with syllabi comprising of theory,
theory cum practical, practical courses in each semester, professional skills training,
project work, internship, etc. that have been approved by the respective Board of Studies
and Academic Council of the College. All the programmes have well defined Programme
Outcomes (PO), Programme Specific Outcomes (PSO) and Programme Educational
Objectives (PEOs) as per Outcome Based Education (OBE). The content of each course
is designed based on the Course Outcomes (CO). The courses shall be categorized as
follows:
i. Humanities and Social Sciences (HS) including Management Courses
ii. Basic Science (BS) Courses
iii. Engineering Science (ES) Courses
iv. Professional Core (PC) Courses
v. Professional Elective (PE) Courses
vi. Open Elective (OE) Courses
vii. Employability Enhancement Courses (EC) like Project work, Professional Skills,
Comprehensive Test & Viva, Entrepreneurships/Start ups and Internship in
Industry or elsewhere
viii. Audit Courses (AC)
ix. Mandatory Courses (MC) like Student Induction Program and Environmental
Science.
x. Honours Degree Courses (HC)
4.2 Credit Assignment and Honours Degree
4.2.1. Credit Assignment
Each course is assigned certain number of credits as follows:
Contact period per week Credits
1 Lecture / Tutorial Period 1
2 Practical Periods 1
2 Project Work Periods 1
40 Training / Internship Periods 1
The minimum number of credits to complete the BE/BTech programme is 169.
4.2.2. Honours Degree
If a candidate earns 18 to 20 additional credits in an emerging area, then he/she can be
awarded with Honours degree mentioning that emerging area as his/her specialization.
The respective board of studies shall recommend the specializations for honours degree
and appropriate additional courses to be studied by the candidate which shall get
approval from Academic Council of the institution. A candidate shall have not less than
8.0 CGPA and no history of arrears during the entire programme to opt for the honours
degree.
Various specializations for various branches recommended by the respective boards of
studies are given below:
S. Specializations for Honours To be offered as Honours, Only for the
No. degree in emerging areas following branches mentioned against the
specialization
1. Construction Technology Civil Engineering
2. Robotics Mechanical Engineering
3. Electric Vehicles Mechanical Engineering
4. Artificial Intelligence and Mechatronics Engineering
Machine Learning
5. Electric Vehicles Automobile Engineering
6. Artificial Intelligence and Electronics and Communication
Machine Learning Engineering
7. Electric Vehicles Electrical and Electronics Engineering
8. Control Systems and Sensors Electronics and Instrumentation
Technology Engineering
9. Cyber Security Computer Science and Engineering
10. Data Science Computer Science and Engineering
11. Cyber Security Information Technology
12. Data Science Information Technology
13. Waste Technology Chemical Engineering
14. Food Processing and Food Technology
Management
The courses specified under Honours degree in the emerging area may include theory,
theory cum practical, practical, project work, etc. under the particular specialization. A
candidate can choose and study these specified courses from fourth semester onwards
and he/she shall successfully complete the courses within the stipulated time vide
clause 5. Total number of credits earned in each semester may vary from candidate to
candidate based on the courses chosen. The registration, assessment & evaluation pattern
and classification of grades of these courses shall be the same as that of the courses in the
regular curriculum of the programme of the candidate vide clause 6, clause 7 and
clause 15 respectively. A candidate can earn Honours degree in only one specialization
during the entire duration of the programme.
4.3 Employability Enhancement Courses

A candidate shall be offered with the employability enhancement courses like project
work, internship, professional skills training, comprehensive test & viva, internship and
entrepreneurships/start ups during the programme to gain/exhibit the knowledge/skills.
4.3.1 Professional Skills Training/ Entrepreneurships/Start Ups
A candidate may be offered with appropriate training courses imparting
programming skills, communication skills, problem solving skills, aptitude skills
etc. It is offered in two phases as phase I in fifth semester and phase II in sixth
semester including vacation periods and each phase can carry two credits.
(or)
A candidate may be allowed to go for training at research organizations or
industries for a required number of hours in sixth semester vacation period. Such
candidate can earn two credits for this training course in place of Professional
Skills Training course II in sixth semester. He/She shall attend Professional Skills
Training Phase I in fifth semester and can earn two credits.
(or)
A candidate may be allowed to set up a start up and working part-time for the start
ups by applying his/her innovations and can become a student entrepreneur
during BE/BTech programme. Candidates can set up their start up from fifth
semester onwards either inside or outside of the college. Such student entrepreneurs
may earn a maximum of 2 credits per semester for two semesters each in place of
either Professional Skills Training I or Professional Skills Training II. The area in
which the candidate wants to initiate a start up may be interdisciplinary or
multidisciplinary. The progress of the startup shall be evaluated by a panel of
members constituted by the Principal through periodic reviews.
4.3.2 Comprehensive Test & Viva
The overall knowledge of the candidate in various courses he/she studied shall be
evaluated by (i) conducting comprehensive tests with multiple choice questions
generally with pattern similar to GATE and/or (ii) viva-voce examination
conducted by a panel of experts assigned by the Head of the department. The
members can examine the knowledge of the candidate by asking questions from
various domains and the marks will be assigned based on their answers. This
course shall carry two credits.
4.3.3 Internships
The curriculum enables a candidate to go for full time projects through internship
during a part of seventh semester and/or entire final semester and can earn credits
vide clause 7.6 and clause 7.11.
A candidate is permitted to go for full time projects through internship in seventh
semester with the following condition: The candidate shall complete a part of the
seventh semester courses with a total credit of about 50% of the total credits of
seventh semester including Project Work I Phase II in the first two months from the
commencement of the seventh semester under fast track mode. The balance credits
required to complete the seventh semester shall be earned by the candidate through
either approved Value Added Courses /Online courses / Self Study Courses or
Add/Drop courses as per clause 4.4 and clause 4.5 respectively.
A candidate is permitted to go for full time projects through internship during
eighth semester. Such candidate shall earn the minimum number of credits required
to complete eighth semester other than project through either approved Value
Added Courses /Online courses / Self Study Courses or Add/Drop courses as per
clause 4.4 and clause 4.5 respectively.
Assessment procedure is to be followed as specified in the guidelines approved by
the Academic Council.
4.4 Value Added Courses / Online Courses / Self Study Courses
The candidates may optionally undergo Value Added Courses / Online Courses /
Self Study Courses as elective courses.
4.4.1 Value Added Courses: Value Added courses each with One / Two credits shall
be offered by the college with the prior approval from respective Board of
Studies. A candidate can earn a maximum of six credits through value added
courses during the entire duration of the programme.
4.4.2 Online Courses: Candidates may be permitted to earn credits for online courses,
offered by NPTEL / SWAYAM / a University / Other Agencies, approved by
respective Board of Studies.
4.4.3 Self Study Courses: The Department may offer an elective course as a self study
course. The syllabus of the course shall be approved by the respective Board of
Studies. However, mode of assessment for a self study course will be the same as
that used for other courses. The candidates shall study such courses on their own
under the guidance of member of the faculty following due approval procedure.
Self study course is limited to one per semester.
4.4.4 The elective courses in the final year may be exempted if a candidate earns the
required credits vide clause 4.4.1, 4.4.2 and 4.4.3 by registering the required
number of courses in advance.
4.4.5 A candidate can earn a maximum of 30 credits through all value added courses,
online courses and self study courses.
4.5 Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses
4.5.1 A candidate has to earn the total number of credits specified in the curriculum of
the respective programme of study in order to be eligible to obtain the degree.
However, if the candidate wishes, then the candidate is permitted to earn more
than the total number of credits prescribed in the curriculum of the candidate’s
programme.
4.5.2 From the first to eighth semesters the candidates have the option of registering for
additional elective/Honours courses or dropping of already registered additional
elective/Honours courses within two weeks from the start of the semester. Add /
Drop is only an option given to the candidates. Total number of credits of such
courses during the entire programme of study cannot exceed eight.
4.6 Maximum number of credits the candidate can enroll in a particular semester cannot
exceed 30 credits.
4.7 The blend of different courses shall be so designed that the candidate at the end of the
programme would have been trained not only in his / her relevant professional field but
also would have developed to become a socially conscious human being.
4.8 The medium of instruction, examinations and project report shall be English.
5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME
5.1 A candidate is normally expected to complete the BE / BTech Degree programme in

8 consecutive semesters/4 Years (6 semesters/3 Years for lateral entry candidate), but in
any case not more than 14 semesters/7 Years (12 semesters/6 Years for lateral entry
candidate).
5.2 Each semester shall consist of a minimum of 90 working days including continuous
assessment test period. The Head of the Department shall ensure that every teacher
imparts instruction as per the number of periods specified in the syllabus for the course
being taught.
5.3 The total duration for completion of the programme reckoned from the commencement
of the first semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not exceed the maximum
duration specified in clause 5.1 irrespective of the period of break of study (vide
clause 11) or prevention (vide clause 9) in order that the candidate may be eligible for the
award of the degree (vide clause 16). Extension beyond the prescribed period shall not be
permitted.
6. COURSE REGISTRATION FOR THE EXAMINATION
6.1 Registration for the end semester examination is mandatory for courses in the current
semester as well as for the arrear courses failing which the candidate will not be
permitted to move on to the higher semester. This will not be applicable for the courses
which do not have an end semester examination.
6.2 The candidates who need to reappear for the courses which have only continuous
assessment shall enroll for the same in the subsequent semester, when offered next, and
repeat the course. In this case, the candidate shall attend the classes, satisfy the
attendance requirements (vide clause 8), earn continuous assessment marks. This will be
considered as an attempt for the purpose of classification.
6.3 If a candidate is prevented from writing end semester examination of a course due to lack
of attendance, the candidate has to attend the classes, when offered next, and fulfill the
attendance requirements as per clause 8 and earn continuous assessment marks. If the
course, in which the candidate has a lack of attendance, is an elective, the candidate may
register for the same or any other elective course in the subsequent semesters and that
will be considered as an attempt for the purpose of classification.
6.4 A candidate shall register for the chosen courses as well as arrear courses (if any vide
clause 6.2 and 6.3) from the list of courses specified under Honours degree.
7. ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION PROCEDURE FOR AWARDING MARKS
7.1 The BE/BTech programmes consist of Theory Courses, Theory cum Practical courses,
Practical courses, Project Work, Professional Skills Training / Industrial Training,
Internship and Entrepreneurships/ Start ups. Performance in each course of study shall
be evaluated based on (i) Continuous Assessments (CA) throughout the semester and (ii)
End Semester Examination (ESE) at the end of the semester except for the courses which
are evaluated based on continuous assessment only. Each course shall be evaluated for a
maximum of 100 marks as shown below:
Sl. Continuous End Semester

Category of Course Assessment Examination
No.
Marks Marks
1. Theory / Practical 50 50
2. Theory cum Practical The distribution of marks shall be

decided based on the credit
weightage assigned to theory and
practical components.
3. Professional Skills Training / / 100 ---

Comprehensive Test & Viva /
Entrepreneurships / Start ups / Project
Work 1 / Industrial Training /
Mandatory Course
4. Project Work 2 Phase I / Project Work 2 50 50
Phase II / Internships
5. Value Added Course The distribution ---

of marks shall be
6. All other Courses decided based on
the credit
weightage
assigned
7.2 Examiners for setting end semester examination question papers for theory courses,
theory cum practical courses and practical courses and evaluating end semester
examination answer scripts, project works, internships and entrepreneurships/start ups
shall be appointed by the Controller of Examinations after obtaining approval from the
Principal.
7.3 Theory Courses

For all theory courses out of 100 marks, the continuous assessment shall be 50 marks and
the end semester examination shall be for 50 marks. However, the end semester
examinations shall be conducted for 100 marks and the marks obtained shall be reduced
to 50. The continuous assessment tests shall be conducted as per the schedule laid down
in the academic schedule. Three tests shall be conducted for 50 marks each and reduced
to 30 marks each. The total of the continuous assessment marks and the end semester
examination marks shall be rounded off to the nearest integer.
7.3.1 The assessment pattern for awarding continuous assessment marks shall be as
follows:
Sl. Max.
Type Remarks
No. Marks
Test - I 30
1. Test - II 30 Average of best two
Test - III 30
Should be of Open
Book/Objective Type.
Average of best 4 (or
2. Tutorial 15 more, depending on the
nature of the course, as
may be approved by
Principal)
Assignment / Paper Presentation
To be assessed by the
in Conference / Seminar /
3. 05 Course Teacher based
Comprehension / Activity based
on any one type.
learning / Class notes
Rounded off to the one
Total 50
decimal place
However, the assessment pattern for awarding the continuous assessment marks
may be changed based on the nature of the course and is to be approved by the
Principal.
7.3.2 A reassessment test or tutorial covering the respective test or tutorial portions
may be conducted for those candidates who were absent with valid reasons
(Sports or any other reason approved by the Principal).
7.3.3 The end semester examination for theory courses shall be for a duration of
three hours and shall be conducted between November and January during odd
semesters and between April and June during even semesters every year.
7.4 Theory cum Practical Courses
For courses involving theory and practical components, the evaluation pattern as per the
clause 7.1 shall be followed. Depending on the nature of the course, the end semester
examination shall be conducted for theory and the practical components. The
apportionment of continuous assessment and end semester examination marks shall be
decided based on the credit weightage assigned to theory and practical components
approved by Principal.
7.5 Practical Courses
For all practical courses out of 100 marks, the continuous assessment shall be for 50
marks and the end semester examination shall be for 50 marks. Every exercise /
experiment shall be evaluated based on the candidate’s performance during the practical
class and the candidate's records shall be maintained.
7.5.1 The assessment pattern for awarding continuous assessment marks for each
course shall be decided by the course coordinator based on rubrics of that
particular course, and shall be based on rubrics for each experiment.
7.6 Project Work II Phase I / Project Work II Phase II
7.6.1 Project work shall be assigned to a single candidate or to a group of
candidates not exceeding 4 candidates in a group. The project work is mandatory
for all the candidates.
7.6.2 The Head of the Department shall constitute review committee for project
work. There shall be two assessments by the review committee during the
semester. The candidate shall make presentation on the progress made by
him/her before the committee.
7.6.3 The continuous assessment and end semester examination marks for Project
Work II (both Phase I and Phase II) and the Viva-Voce Examination shall be
distributed as below:
Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

(Max. 50 Marks) (Max. 50 Marks)
Report
Review I Review II Evaluation Viva - Voce
Zeroth Review
(Max.. 20 Marks) (Max. 30 Marks) (Max. 20 (Max. 30 Marks)
Marks)
Rv. Guide Review Guide Review Guide Ext. Exr. Guide Exr.1 Exr.2
Com Committee Committee
(excluding (excluding
guide) guide)
0 0 10 10 15 15 20 10 10 10
7.6.4 The Project Report prepared according to approved guidelines and duly signed
by the Supervisor shall be submitted to Head of the Department. The
candidate(s) must submit the project report within the specified date as per the
academic schedule of the semester. If the project report is not submitted within
the specified date then the candidate is deemed to have failed in the Project
Work and redo it in the subsequent semester.
7.6.5 If a candidate fails to secure 50% of the continuous assessment marks in the
project work, he / she shall not be permitted to submit the report for that
particular semester and shall have to redo it in the subsequent semester and
satisfy attendance requirements.
7.6.6 The project work shall be evaluated based on the project report submitted by
the candidate in the respective semester and viva-voce examination by a
committee consisting of two examiners and guide of the project work.
7.6.7 If a candidate fails to secure 50 % of the end semester examination marks in the
project work, he / she shall be required to resubmit the project report within 30
days from the date of declaration of the results and a fresh viva-voce
examination shall be conducted as per clause 7.6.6.
7.6.8 A copy of the approved project report after the successful completion of
viva-voce examination shall be kept in the department library.
7.7 Project Work I Phase I / Industrial Training
The evaluation method shall be same as that of the Project Work II as per clause 7.6
excluding 7.6.3, 7.6.5, 7.6.6 and 7.6.7. The marks distribution is given below:
Continuous Assessment
(Max. 100 Marks)
Review III
(Max. 50 Marks)
Review I Review II Report
Zeroth Review
(Max.. 20 Marks) (Max.. 30 Marks) Evaluation Viva - Voce
(Max. 20 (Max. 30 Marks)
Marks)
Review Guide Review Guide Review Guide Review Guide Review
Commi Committee Committee Committee Committee
ttee (excluding (excluding
guide) guide)
0 0 10 10 15 15 20 10 20
If a candidate fails to secure 50 % of the continuous assessment marks in this course, he /
she shall be required to resubmit the project report within 30 days from the date of
declaration of the results and a fresh viva-voce examination shall be conducted.
7.8 Professional Skills Training
Phase I training shall be conducted for minimum of 80 hours in 4th semester vacation and
during 5th semester. Phase II training shall be conducted for minimum of 80 hours in 5th
semester vacation and during 6th semester. The evaluation procedure shall be approved
by the Principal.
7.9 Comprehensive Test/Viva

A candidate can earn 2 credits by successfully completing this course. The evaluation
procedures shall be approved by the Principal.
7.10 Entrepreneurships/ Start ups

A start up/business model may be started by a candidate individually or by a group of
maximum of three candidates during the programme vide clause 4.3.1. The head of the
department concerned shall assign a faculty member as a mentor for each start up.
A review committee shall be formed by the Principal for reviewing the progress of the
Start ups / Business models, innovativeness, etc. The review committee can recommend
the appropriate grades for academic performance for the candidate(s) involved in the
start ups. This course shall carry a maximum of two credits in fifth semester and two
credits in sixth semester respectively and shall be evaluated through continuous
assessments for a maximum of 100 marks vide clause 7.1. A report about the start ups is
to be submitted to the review committee for evaluation for each start up and the marks
will be given to Controller of Examinations after getting approval from Principal.
7.11 Projects through Internships
Each candidate shall submit a brief report about the internship undergone and a
certificate issued from the organization concerned at the time of Viva-voce examination
to the review committee. The evaluation method shall be same as that of the Project
Work II as per clause 7.6.
7.12 Value Added Course
Minimum of two assessments shall be conducted during the value added course duration
by the offering department concerned.
7.13 Online Course

The Board of Studies will provide methodology for the evaluation of the online courses.
The Board can decide whether to evaluate the online courses through continuous
assessment and end semester examination or through end semester examination only. In
case of credits earned through online mode from NPTEL / SWAYAM / a University /
Other Agencies approved by Chairman, Academic Council, the credits may be
transferred and grades shall be assigned accordingly.
7.14 Self Study Course

The member of faculty approved by the Head of the Department shall be responsible for
periodic monitoring and evaluation of the course. The course shall be evaluated through
continuous assessment and end semester examination. The evaluation methodology shall
be the same as that of a theory course.
7.15 Audit Course
A candidate may be permitted to register for specific course not listed in his/her
programme curriculum and without undergoing the rigors of getting a 'good' grade, as an
Audit course, subject to the following conditions.
The candidate can register only one Audit course in a semester starting from
second semester subject to a maximum of two courses during the entire programme of
study. Such courses shall be indicated as 'Audit' during the time of registration itself.
Only courses currently offered for credit to the candidates of other branches can be
audited.
A course appearing in the curriculum of a candidate cannot be considered as an audit
course. However, if a candidate has already met the Professional Elective and Open
Elective credit requirements as stipulated in the curriculum, then, a Professional Elective
or an Open Elective course listed in the curriculum and not taken by the candidate for
credit can be considered as an audit course.
Candidates registering for an audit course shall meet all the assessment and examination
requirements (vide clause 7.3) applicable for a credit candidate of that course. Only if
the candidate obtains a performance grade, the course will be listed in the semester
Grade Sheet and in the Consolidated Grade Sheet along with the grade SF (Satisfactory).
Performance grade will not be shown for the audit course.
Since an audit course has no grade points assigned, it will not be counted for the purpose
of GPA and CGPA calculations.
7.16 Mandatory Course
A candidate shall attend and complete the induction training program of duration three
weeks at the beginning of the first semester. It is mandatory for all candidates who have
joined in various branches of all BE/BTech programmes. The induction training program
includes the courses recommended by AICTE. Apart from this induction program, a
candidate shall undergo the courses listed by AICTE as mandatory courses during their
programme. No credits shall be given for such courses and shall be evaluated through
continuous assessment tests only vide clause 7.1 for a maximum of 100 marks each.
Since these courses have no grade points assigned, these courses will not be counted for
the purpose of GPA and CGPA calculations.
7.17 Yoga and Values for Holistic Development (YVHD) and Universal Human Values
(UHV)
Courses such as YVHD and UHV shall be offered to all candidates of all BE/BTech
programmes. These courses shall carry a maximum of 100 marks each and shall be
evaluated through continuous assessment tests only vide clause 7.1. The candidate(s) can
earn 2 credits for UHV and 1 credit for YVHD by successfully completing these courses.
Two continuous assessment tests will be conducted and the average marks will be taken
for the calculation of grades.
8. REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPLETION OF A SEMESTER
8.1 A candidate who has fulfilled the following conditions shall be deemed to have
satisfied the requirements for completion of a semester and permitted to appear for the
examinations of that semester.
8.1.1 Ideally, every candidate is expected to attend all classes and secure 100 %
attendance. However, a candidate shall secure not less than 80 % (after
rounding off to the nearest integer) of the overall attendance taking into account
the total number of working days in a semester.
8.1.2 A candidate who could not satisfy the attendance requirements as per clause
8.1.1 due to medical reasons (hospitalization / accident / specific illness) but has
secured not less than 70 % in the current semester may be permitted to appear
for the current semester examinations with the approval of the Principal on
payment of a condonation fee as may be fixed by the authorities from time to
time. The medical certificate needs to be submitted along with the leave
application. A candidate can avail this provision only twice during the entire
duration of the degree programme.
A candidate who could not satisfy the attendance requirements as per clause
8.1.1 due to his/her entrepreneurships/ start ups activities, but has secured not
less than 60 % in the current semester can be permitted to appear for the current
semester examinations with the recommendation of review committee and
approval from the Principal.
8.1.3 In addition to clause 8.1.1 or 8.1.2, a candidate shall secure not less than 60 %
attendance in each course.
8.1.4 A candidate shall be deemed to have completed the requirements of study of any
semester only if he/she has satisfied the attendance requirements (vide clause
8.1.1 to 8.1.3) and has registered for examination by paying the prescribed fee.
8.1.5 Candidate’s progress is satisfactory.
8.1.6 Candidate’s conduct is satisfactory and he/she was not involved in any
indisciplined activities in the current semester.
8.2. The candidates who do not complete the semester as per clauses from 8.1.1 to 8.1.6
except 8.1.3 shall not be permitted to appear for the examinations at the end of the
semester and not be permitted to go to the next semester. They have to repeat the
incomplete semester in next academic year.
8.3 The candidates who satisfy the clause 8.1.1 or 8.1.2 but do not complete the course as
per clause 8.1.3 shall not be permitted to appear for the end semester examination of
that course alone. They have to repeat the incomplete course in the subsequent
semester when it is offered next.
9. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR END SEMESTER EXAMINATION
9.1 A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for end semester examination of the
current semester if he/she has satisfied the semester completion requirements as per
clause 8, and has registered for examination in all courses of that semester. Registration
is mandatory for current semester examinations as well as for arrear examinations
failing which the candidate shall not be permitted to move on to the higher semester.
9.2 When a candidate is deputed for a National / International Sports event during End
Semester examination period, supplementary examination shall be conducted for such a
candidate on return after participating in the event within a reasonable period of time.
Such appearance shall be considered as first appearance.
9.3 A candidate who has already appeared for a course in a semester and passed the
examination is not entitled to reappear in the same course for improvement of letter
grades / marks.
10. PROVISION FOR WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATIONS
10.1 A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission to withdraw from appearing
for the examination in any regular course or all regular courses registered in a particular
semester. Application for withdrawal is permitted only once during the entire duration
of the degree programme.
10.2 The withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to
write the examination (vide clause 9) and has applied to the Principal for permission
prior to the last examination of that semester after duly recommended by the Head of
the Department.
10.3 The withdrawal shall not be considered as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of a
candidate for First Class with Distinction/First Class.
10.4 If a candidate withdraws a course or courses from writing end semester examinations,
he/she shall register the same in the subsequent semester and write the end semester
examinations. A final semester candidate who has withdrawn shall be permitted to
appear for supplementary examination to be conducted within reasonable time as per
clause 14.
10.5 The final semester candidate who has withdrawn from appearing for project viva-voce
for genuine reasons shall be permitted to appear for supplementary viva-voce
examination within reasonable time with proper application to Controller of
Examinations and on payment of prescribed fee.
11. PROVISION FOR BREAK OF STUDY

11.1 A candidate is normally permitted to avail the authorised break of study under valid
reasons (such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health or any other valid
reasons) and to rejoin the programme in a later semester. He/She shall apply in advance
to the Principal, through the Head of the Department, stating the reasons therefore, in
any case, not later than the last date for registering for that semester examination.
A candidate is permitted to avail the authorised break of study only once during the
entire period of study for a maximum period of one year. However, in extraordinary
situation the candidate may apply for additional break of study not exceeding another one
year by paying prescribed fee for the break of study.
11.2 The candidates permitted to rejoin the programme after break of study / prevention due
to lack of attendance shall be governed by the rules and regulations in force at the time
of rejoining.
11.3 The candidates rejoining in new Regulations shall apply to the Principal in the
prescribed format through Head of the Department at the beginning of the readmitted
semester itself for prescribing additional/equivalent courses, if any, from any semester
of the regulations in-force, so as to bridge the curriculum in-force and the old
curriculum.
11.4 The total period of completion of the programme reckoned from the commencement of
the semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not exceed the maximum period
specified in clause 5 irrespective of the period of break of study in order to qualify for
the award of the degree.
11.5 If any candidate is prevented for want of required attendance, the period of prevention
shall not be considered as authorized break of study.
11.6 If a candidate has not reported to the college for a period of two consecutive semesters
without any intimation, the name of the candidate shall be deleted permanently from the
college enrollment. Such candidates are not entitled to seek readmission under any
circumstances.
12. PASSING REQUIREMENTS
12.1 A candidate who secures not less than 50 % of total marks (continuous assessment and
end semester examination put together) prescribed for the course with a minimum of
45 % of the marks prescribed for the end semester examination in all category of
courses vide clause 7.1 except for the courses which are evaluated based on continuous
assessment only shall be declared to have successfully passed the course in the
examination.
12.2 A candidate who secures not less than 50 % in continuous assessment marks prescribed
for the courses which are evaluated based on continuous assessment only shall be
declared to have successfully passed the course. If a candidate secures less than 50% in
the continuous assessment marks, he / she shall have to re-enroll for the same in the
subsequent semester and satisfy the attendance requirements.
12.3 For a candidate who does not satisfy the clause 12.1, the continuous assessment marks
secured by the candidate in the first attempt shall be retained and considered valid for
subsequent attempts. However, from the fourth attempt onwards the marks scored in the
end semester examinations alone shall be considered, in which case the candidate shall
secure minimum 50 % marks in the end semester examinations to satisfy the passing
requirements, but the grade awarded shall be only the lowest passing grade irrespective
of the marks secured.
13. REVALUATION OF ANSWER SCRIPTS
A candidate shall apply for a photocopy of his / her semester examination answer script within
a reasonable time from the declaration of results, on payment of a prescribed fee by submitting
the proper application to the Controller of Examinations. The answer script shall be pursued and
justified jointly by a faculty member who has handled the course and the course coordinator and
recommended for revaluation. Based on the recommendation, the candidate can register for
revaluation through proper application to the Controller of Examinations. The Controller of
Examinations will arrange for revaluation and the results will be intimated to the candidate
concerned. Revaluation is permitted only for Theory courses and Theory cum Practical courses
where end semester examination is involved.
14. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION

If a candidate fails to clear all courses in the final semester after the announcement of final end
semester examination results, he/she shall be allowed to take up supplementary examinations to
be conducted within a reasonable time for the courses of final semester alone, so that he/she
gets a chance to complete the programme.
The candidates who have failed in the courses Professional Skill Training I/II and
Comprehensive Test/Viva shall be permitted to take up supplementary examinations.
15. AWARD OF LETTER GRADES
Range of % of Total Marks Letter Grade Grade Point
91 to 100 O (Outstanding) 10
81 to 90 A+ (Excellent) 9
71 to 80 A (Very Good) 8
61 to 70 B+ (Good) 7
50 to 60 B (Average) 6
Less than 50 RA (Reappear) 0
Satisfactory SF 0
Withdrawal W -
Absent AB -
Shortage of Attendance in a SA -
course
The Grade Point Average (GPA) is calculated using the formula:
course credits  grade points  for all courses in the specific semester
GPA =
course credits  for all courses in the specific semester
The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is calculated from first semester (third semester
for lateral entry candidates) to final semester using the formula
course credits  grade points  for all courses in all the semesters so far
CGPA=
course credits  for all courses in all the semesters so far
The GPA and CGPA are computed only for the candidates with a pass in all the courses.
The GPA and CGPA indicate the academic performance of a candidate at the end of a semester
and at the end of successive semesters respectively.
A grade sheet for each semester shall be issued containing Grade obtained in each course, GPA
and CGPA.
A duplicate copy, if required can be obtained on payment of a prescribed fee and satisfying
other procedure requirements.
Withholding of Grades: The grades of a candidate may be withheld if he/she has not cleared
his/her dues or if there is a disciplinary case pending against him/her or for any other reason.
16. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE

A candidate shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the BE / BTech Degree provided
the candidate has
i. Successfully completed all the courses under the different categories, as specified in the
regulations.
ii. Successfully gained the required number of total credits as specified in the curriculum
corresponding to the candidate’s programme within the stipulated time (vide clause 5).
iii. Successfully passed any additional courses prescribed by the respective Board of Studies
whenever readmitted under regulations other than R-2020 (vide clause 11.3)
iv. No disciplinary action pending against him / her.
17. CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE AWARDED
17.1 First Class with Distinction:
17.1.1 A candidate who qualifies for the award of the degree (vide clause 16) and
who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed
the examination in First class with Distinction:
 Should have passed the examination in all the courses of all the eight
semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates) in the First
Appearance within eight consecutive semesters (six consecutive
semesters for lateral entry candidates) excluding the authorized break of
study (vide clause 11) after the commencement of his / her study.
 Withdrawal from examination (vide clause 10) shall not be
considered as an appearance.
 Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 8.50
(OR)
17.1.2 A candidate who joins from other institutions on transfer and who gets
readmitted and has to move from one regulations to another regulations and
who qualifies for the award of the degree (vide clause 16) and satisfies the
following conditions shall be declared to have passed the examination
in First class with Distinction:
 Should have passed the examination in all the courses of all the
eight semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates) in the
First Appearance within eight consecutive semesters (six consecutive
semesters for lateral entry candidates) excluding the authorized break
of study (vide clause 11) after the commencement of his / her
study.
 Submission of equivalent course list approved by the respective
Board of studies.
 Withdrawal from examination (vide clause 10) shall not be
considered as an appearance.
17.2 First Class:
A candidate who qualifies for the award of the degree (vide clause 16) and who
satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First class:
 Should have passed the examination in all the courses of all eight semesters (six
semesters for lateral entry candidates) within ten consecutive semesters (eight
consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) excluding authorized break of
study (vide clause 11) after the commencement of his / her study.
 Withdrawal from the examination (vide clause 10) shall not be considered as an
appearance.
17.3 Second Class:
All other candidates (not covered in clauses 17.1 and 17.2) who qualify for the award
of the degree (vide clause 16) shall be declared to have passed the examination in
Second Class.
17.4 A candidate who is absent for end semester examination in a course / project work after
having registered for the same shall be considered to have appeared for that examination
for the purpose of classification.
17.5 Honours Degree:

A candidate who qualifies for the award of the degree (vide clause 16) and who
satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have earned the BE/BTech
degree with Honours (vide clause 16 and clause 4.2.2):
 Should have passed the examination in all the courses of all the eight
semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates) in the First Appearance
within eight consecutive semesters (six consecutive semesters for lateral entry
candidates) excluding the authorized break of study (vide clause 11) after the
commencement of his / her study.
 Withdrawal from examination (vide clause 10) shall not be considered as an
appearance.
18. MALPRACTICES IN TESTS AND EXAMINATIONS

If a candidate indulges in malpractice in any of the tests or end semester examinations, he/she
shall be liable for punitive action as per the examination rules prescribed by the college from
time to time.
19. AMENDMENTS
Notwithstanding anything contained in this manual, the Kongu Engineering College through the
Academic council of the Kongu Engineering College, reserves the right to modify/amend
without notice, the Regulations, Curricula, Syllabi, Scheme of Examinations, procedures,
requirements, and rules pertaining to its BE / BTech programme.
******
CURRICULUM BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE (for 2020-21 / 2021-22 batches of students)
Summary of Credit Distribution

Total Curriculum Content
Semester number of (% of total number of
Category credits credits of the program)
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
HS 3 4 3 3 13 7.7 %
BS 11 11 4 4 30 17.75 %
ES 4 4 4 8 20 11.8 %
PC 4 4 12 8 12 12 4 56 33.15 %
PE 3 12 3 18 10.65 %
OE 4 4 3 3 14 8.3 %
EC 2 6 3 7 18 10.65 %
MC 2 2 1.2 %
Semester
22 23 23 24 21 21 22 13 169 100.00
wise Total
CATEGORISATION OF COURSES
HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCE INCLUDING MANAGEMENT
(HS)
S. Course
Course Name L T P C Sem
No. Code
1. 20EGT11 English Language Skills 3 0 0 3 I
2. 20EGT21 Advanced Communication Skills 3 0 0 3 II
3. 20VEC11 Yoga Values for Holistic Development 1 0 1 1 II

English for Workplace Communication
4. 20EGL31 0 0 2 1 III
Laboratory
5. 20GET31 Universal Human Values 2 0 0 2 III
6. 20GET71 Engineering Economics and Management 3 0 0 3 VII

Total Credits to be earned 13
BASIC SCIENCE (BS)

S. Course
No. Code
1. 20MAC11 Matrices and Differential Equations 3 1* 2* 4 I
2. 20PHT11 Applied Physics 3 0 0 3 I
3. 20CYT11 Applied Chemistry 3 0 0 3 I
4. 20PHL11 Physical Sciences Laboratory I 0 0 2 1 I

Multivariable Calculus and Complex
5. 20MAC21 3 1* 2* 4 II
Analysis
Physics for Communication and
6. 20PHT23 3 0 0 3 II
Computer Science Engineering
7. 20CYT23 Chemistry of Electronic Materials 3 0 0 3 II
8. 20PHL24 Physical Sciences Laboratory II 0 0 2 1 II
9. 20MAT33 Linear Algebra and Transforms 3 1 0 4 III

Probability Theory and Stochastic
10. 20MAT43 3 1 0 4 IV
Process
ENGINEERING SCIENCE (ES)

S. Course
No. Code
1. 20ECT11 Basics of Electrical Engineering 3 0 0 3 I
Basics of Electrical Engineering
2. 20ECL11 0 0 2 1 I
Laboratory
3. 20MEC11 Engineering Drawing 2 0 2 3 II
4. 20MEL11 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 2 1 II
5. 20CSC31 Programming in C 3 0 2 4 III/II
6. 20CSC41 Python Programming 3 0 2 4 IV/III
7. 20ECT43 Control Engineering 3 1 0 4 IV
PROFESSIONAL CORE (PC)

S. Course Domain/
No. Code Stream
1. 20ECT12 Circuit Theory and Network Analysis 3 1 0 4 I EL
2. 20ECT21 Electromagnetic Fields 3 1 0 4 II/III CN
3. 20ECT31 Digital Electronics 3 0 0 3 III VD
4. 20ECT32 Solid State Devices and Circuits 3 0 0 3 III EL
5. 20ECT33 Signals and Systems 3 1 0 4 III/IV SIP
6. 20ECL31 Digital Electronics Laboratory 0 0 2 1 III VD

Solid State Devices and Circuits
7. 20ECL32 0 0 2 1 III EL
Laboratory
8. 20ECT41 Electronic Circuits 3 0 0 3 IV EL
9. 20ECT42 Microprocessor and Microcontroller 3 0 0 3 IV ES
10. 20ECL41 Electronic Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 IV EL

Microprocessor and Microcontroller
11. 20ECL42 0 0 2 1 IV ES
Laboratory
12. 20ECT51 Analog and Digital Communication 3 0 0 3 V CN
13. 20ECT52 Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 V SIP
14. 20ECT53 Linear Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 V EL

Analog and Digital Communication
15. 20ECL51 0 0 2 1 V CN
Laboratory
16. 20ECL52 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory 0 0 2 1 V SIP
17. 20ECL53 Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 V EL
18. 20ECT61 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 VI VD
19. 20ECT62 Data Communication and Networking 3 0 0 3 VI CN
20. 20ECT63 Microwave and Optical Communication 3 0 0 3 VI CN
21. 20ECL61 VLSI Design Laboratory 0 0 2 1 VI VD

Data Communication and Networking VI
22. 20ECL62 0 0 2 1 CN
Laboratory
Microwave and Optical Communication VI
23. 20ECL63 0 0 2 1 CN
Laboratory
24. 20ECT71 Antennas and Wave Propagation 3 0 2 4 VII CN
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES

S. Course Domain/
No. Code Stream
Elective 1
1. 20ECE01 Transmission Lines and Waveguides 3 0 0 3 V CN
2. 20ECE02 Microcontroller Based Automation 2 0 2 3 V ES
3. 20ECE03 Medical Electronics 3 0 0 3 V EL
4. 20ECE04 Computer Architecture and Interfacing 3 0 0 3 V EL
5. 20ECE05 OptoElectronics 3 0 0 3 V EL
6. 20ECE06 Soft Computational Techniques 3 0 0 3 V SIP
7. 20ECE07 Linux Operating Systems 2 0 0 2 V SD
Elective 2
8. 20ECE08 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3 VII CN
9. 20ECE09 Embedded System Design 3 0 0 3 VII ES
10 20ECE10 Modern Electronic Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 VII EL
11 20ECE11 Electronics Circuit Board Design 2 0 2 3 VII EL
12 20ECE12 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 VII SIP
13. 20ECE13 ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 VII VD
14. 20ECE14 Network Information Security 3 0 0 3 VII CN
Elective 3
15. 20ECE15 Wireless Broadband Communication 3 0 0 3 VII CN
16. 20ECE16 Embedded IoT 3 0 0 3 VII ES
17. 20ECE17 DSP Processor and its Applications 3 0 0 3 VII SIP
18. 20ECE18 Wavelet Transform and its Applications 3 0 0 3 VII SIP

Testing and Fault Diagnosis of VLSI
19. 20ECE19 3 0 0 3 VII VD
Circuits
20. 20ECE20 Computer Vision 3 0 0 3 VII SD
21. 20ECE21 MEMS Design 3 0 0 3 VII VD
22. Fundamentals of research 3 0 0 3 VII
Elective 4
23. 20ECE22 Satellite Communication 3 0 0 3 VII CN
24. 20ECE23 Wireless Networks 3 0 0 3 VII CN
25. 20ECE24 Real Time Operating system 3 0 0 3 VII ES
26. 20ECE25 Deep Learning and its Applications 3 0 0 3 VII SIP
27. 20ECE26 System Verilog 3 0 0 3 VII VD
28. 20ECE27 Natural Language Processing 3 0 0 3 VII SD
29. 20ECE28 Industry 4.0 3 0 0 3 VII ES
Elective 5
Next Generation Wireless
30. 20ECE29 3 0 0 3 VII CN
Communication
31. 20ECE30 Cyber Physical Systems 3 0 0 3 VIII ES
32. 20ECE31 Automotive Electronic Systems 3 0 0 3 VII EL
33. 20ECE32 Principles of Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 VII SIP

Nano Technology For Energy
34. 20ECE33 2 0 2 3 VII VD
Sustainability
35. 20ECE34 Software Quality Assurance and Testing 3 0 0 3 VII SD
Elective 6
36. 20ECE35 Radar Engineering 3 0 0 3 VIII CN
37. 20ECE36 RF Communications 3 0 0 3 VIII CN
38. 20ECE37 RISC Architecture 3 0 0 3 VIII ES
39. 20ECE38 Remote Sensing 3 0 0 3 VIII SIP

Computer Design Automation for VLSI
40. 20ECE39 3 0 0 3 VII VD
Circuits
41. 20ECE40 Blockchain Technology 3 0 0 3 VIII SD
42. 20ECE41 Quantum Computing and Information 3 0 0 3 VIII VD
43. Entrepreneurship development 3 0 0 3 VIII
EMPLOYABILITY ENHANCEMENT COURSES (EC)

S. Course
No. Code
20GEL51/ Professional Skills Training I / Industrial
1. 0 0 0 2 V
20GEI 51 Training I
20GEL61/ Professional Skills Training II / Industrial
2. 0 0 0 2 VI
20GEI 61 Training II
3. 20GEP61 Comprehensive Test and Viva 0 0 0 2 VI
4. 20ECP61 Project Work I 0 0 4 2 VI
5. 20ECP71 Project Work II Phase I 0 0 6 3 VII
6. 20ECP81 Project Work II Phase II 0 0 14 7 VIII
* Domain/Stream Abbreviations: : EL – Electronics, VD- VLSI Design, CN- Communication & Networks, SIP –
Signal & Image Processing, ES – Embedded Systems, SD – Software Development
OPEN ELECTIVE COURSES OFFERED TO OTHER DEPARTMENTS (OE)

(Common to all departments except offering department)
Course Code Course Name L T P C Sem
20ECO01 Wearable Technology 3 1 0 4 IV

20ECO02 Basics of Electronics in
3 1 0 4 IV
Automation Appliances
20ECO03 Principles of Quantum Computing 3 0 2 4 IV
20ECO04 PCB Design and Fabrication 3 0 2 4 V
20ECO05 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic
3 0 2 4 V
for Engineering Applications
20ECO06 Electronic Hardware and
2 0 2 3 VI
Troubleshooting
20ECO07 Bioinspired Computing
2 0 2 3 VI
Technologies
20ECO08 Optical Engineering 3 0 0 3 VIII
20ECO09 Neural Networks and Deep
2 0 2 3 VIII
Learning with Python
LIST OF OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED TO OTHER DEPARTMENTS

(Common to all BE/BTech branches including ECE branch)
Hours/Week
Course Code Credit Sem
Course Name L T P
20GEO01 German LanguageLevel 1 3 1 0 4 V/VI/VII/VII
20GEO02 Japanese LanguageLevel 1 3 1 0 4 V/VI/VII/VII
20GEO05 German Language Level 2 3 1 0 4 V/VI/VII/VII
20GEO08 Japanese Language Level 2 3 1 0 4 V/VI/VII/VII
LIST OF OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED BY OTHER DEPARTMENTS
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20CEO01 Remote Sensing and its 3 0 2 4
IV
Applications
20CEO02 Disaster Management 3 1 0 4 V
20CEO03 Introduction to Smart Cities 3 0 0 3 VI
20CEO04 Environmental Health and Safety 3 0 0 3 VI
20CEO05 Infrastructure Planning and 3 0 0 3
VIII
Management
20CEO06 Environmental Laws and Policy 3 0 0 3 VIII
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20MEO01 Renewable Energy Sources 3 0 2 4 IV
20MEO02 Design of Experiments 3 0 2 4 V
20MEO03 Fundamentals of Ergonomics 3 0 0 3 VI
20MEO04 Principles of Management and 3 0 0 3
VI
Industrial Psychology
20MEO05 Safety Measures for Engineers 3 0 0 3 VIII
20MEO06 Energy Conservation in Thermal 3 0 0 3
VIII
Equipments
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20MTO01 Design of Mechatronics Systems 3 1 0 4 IV
20MTO02 Factory Automation 3 0 2 4 V
20MTO03 Data Acquisition and Virtual 3 0 2 4 V
Instrumentation
20GEO04 Innovation and Business Model 3 1 0 4 V
Development
20MTO04 3D Printing and Design 3 0 0 3 VI
20MTO05 Drone System Technology 3 0 0 3 VI
20GEO11 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3 VI
20MTO06 Robotics 3 0 0 3 VIII
20MTO07 Virtual and Augment Reality in 3 0 0 3 VIII
Industry4.0
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20AUO01 Automotive Engineering 3 0 2 4 IV
20AUO02 Automotive Electronics 3 0 2 4 V
20AUO03 Vehicle Maintenance 3 0 0 3 VI
20AUO04 Public Transport Management 3 0 0 3 VIII
20AUO05 Autonomous Vehicles 3 0 0 3 VIII
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20EEO01 Solar and Wind Energy Systems 3 1 0 4 IV
20EEO02 Electrical Wiring and Lighting 3 1 0 4 IV
20EEO03 Electrical Safety 3 1 0 4 IV
20EEO04 Energy Conservation and
3 1 0 4 V
Management
20EEO04 AI with MATLAB 3 1 0 4 V
20EEO06 Micro Grid and Smart Grid 3 0 0 3 VI
20EEO07 E-Waste Management 3 0 0 3 VI
20EEO08 Electric Vehicle 3 0 0 3 VIII
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
Neural Networks and Deep
20EIO01 3 1 0 4 V
Learning
Digital Image Processing and Its
20EIO02 3 1 0 4 VI
Applications
20EIO03 Industrial Automation 3 1 0 4 VI
Biomedical Instrumentation and
20EIO04 3 0 0 3 VII
Applications
PLC Programming and Its
20EIO05 3 0 0 3 VII
Applications
20EIO06 Instrumentation for Industry 4.0 3 0 0 3 VII
Measurements and
20EIO07 3 0 0 3 VIII
Instrumentation
Graphical Programming using
20EIO08 3 0 0 3 VIII
Virtual Instrumentation
20EIO09 Testing of Materials 3 0 0 3 VIII
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20CSO01 Fundamentals of Databases 3 0 2 4 IV
20CSO02 Python Programming and
3 0 2 4 IV
Frameworks
20CSO03 Computational science for
3 1 0 4 V
Engineers
20CSO04 Formal languages and automata 3 1 0 4 V
20CSO05 Design thinking for engineers 3 1 0 4 V
20CSO06 Java Programming 2 0 2 3 VI
20CSO07 Web Engineering 2 0 2 3 VI
20CSO08 Foundations of Data Analytics 2 0 2 3 VI
20CSO09 Nature inspired optimization
3 0 0 3 VI
techniques
20CSO10 Fundamentals of IoT 3 0 0 3 VIII
20CSO11 Machine Translation 3 0 0 3 VIII
20CSO12 Applied Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 VIII
20CSO13 Fundamentals of Blockchain 3 0 0 3 VIII
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20ITO01 Artificial Intelligence 3 1 0 4 IV
20ITO02 Web Technologies 3 1 0 4 IV
20ITO03 Introduction to Operating IV
3 1 0 4
Systems
20ITO04 Programming in Python 3 1 0 4 IV
20ITO05 Computer Vision 3 1 0 4 V
20ITO06 Data Science 3 1 0 4 V
20ITO07 NCC Studies (Air Wing) - I 3 0 2 4 V/VI
20ITO08 Bio Natural Language VI
3 0 0 3
Processing
20ITO09 Disaster Management for VI
3 0 0 3
InformationTechnology
20ITO10 Modern Application VIII
3 0 0 3
Development
20ITO11 Object Oriented System VIII
3 0 0 3
Developmentusing UML
20ITO12 Reinforcement Learning 3 0 0 3 VIII
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
Drugs and Pharmaceuticals 3 1 0 4
20CHO01 IV
Technology
20CHO02 Process Automation 3 1 0 4 IV
20CHO03 Fundamentals of Nanoscience 3 0 0 3
V
and Nanotechnology
20CHO04 Principles of bioprocessing 3 0 0 3 V
20CHO05 Bio Energy 3 0 0 3 VI
20CHO06 Rubber Technology 3 0 0 3 VI
20CHO07 Nuclear Engineering 3 0 0 3 VIII
20CHO08 Membrane Technology 3 0 0 3 VIII
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20FTO01 Baking Technology 3 0 2 4 IV
20FTO02 Food Processing Technology 3 1 0 4 IV
Processing of milk and milk
20FTO03 3 0 2 4 V
products
Processing of Fruits and
20FTO04 3 0 2 4 V
Vegetables
20FTO05 Principles of Food safety 3 0 0 3 VI
Fundamentals of Food
20FTO06 3 0 0 3 VI
Packaging and Storage
20FTO07 Food Ingredients 3 0 0 3 VIII
20FTO08 Food and Nutrition 3 0 0 3 VIII
CSD
S. No. Course Name L T P C Sem
1 Fundamentals of User Interactive Design 3 0 0 3 V
2 Fundamentalsof User Experience Design 3 0 0 3 VI
3 Introduction to Mobile Game Design 3 0 0 3 VII
4 Introduction to Graphics Design 3 0 0 3 VIII
KEC R2018: SCHEDULING OF COURSES – BE (Electronics and Communication Engineering) Total Credits :169
Sem
Course1 Course2 Course3 Course4 Course5 Course6 Course7 Course8 Course9 Course10 Credits
20EGT11 20MAC11 20PHT11 20CYT11 20ECT11 Basics 20ECT12 20ECL11 20PHL11 20MNT11 22
I English Matrices and Applied Physics Applied of Electrical Circuit Theory Basics of Physical Induction
Language Skills Differential (3-0-0-3) Chemistry Engineering and Network Electrical Sciences Training
(3-0-0-3) Equations (3-0-0-3) (3-0-0-3) Analysis Engineering Laboratory I (0- Program
(3-1*-2*-4) (3-1-0-4) Laboratory 0-2-1) (-- - -0)
(0-0-2-1)
II 20EGT21 20MAC21 20PHT23 Physics 20CYT23 20MEC11 20ECT21 / 20MEL11 20PHL24 20VEC11 Yoga
Advanced Multivariable for Chemistry of Engineering 20CSC31 Engineering Physical Values for
Communicatio Calculus and Communication Electronic Drawing Electromagneti Practices Sciences Holistic
n Skills (3-0-0- Complex and Computer Materials (2-0-2-3) c Fields(2020- Laboratory Laboratory Development(
3) Analysis (3-1*- Science (3-0-0-3) 2021) (3-1-0- (0-0-2-1)) II(0-0-2-1) 1-0-1-1) 23
2*-4) Engineering 4)
(3-0-0-3) Programming
in C (2021-
2022)(3-0-2-4)
III 20MAT33 20CSC31/ 20ECT31 20ECL32 Solid 20EGL31 20GET31
Linear Algebra 20CSC41 Digital Electronics 20ECT32 20ECT33/ 20ECL31 State Devices English for Universal
and Programming (3-0-0-3) Solid State 20ECT21 Digital and Circuits Workplace Human
Transforms (3- in C(2020- Devices and Signals and Electronics Laboratory Communi Values(2-0-0-2)
1-0-4) 2021/ Circuits Systems(2020- Laboratory (0-0-2-1) cation 23
Python (3-0-0-3) 2021)/ (0-0-2-1) Laboratory
Programming Electromagneti (0-0-2-1)
(2021-2022) c Fields (2021-
(3-0-2-4) 2022) (3-1-0-4)
IV 20MAT43 20CSC41/ 20ECT41 20ECT42 20ECT43 Open Elective I 20ECL42 20ECL42 20MNT31
Probability 20ECT33 Electronic Circuits Microproces Control (3-1-0-4) (3-0- Electronic Microprocesso Environmental
Theory and Python (3-0-0-3) sor and Engineering (3- 2-4) Circuits r and Science
Stochastic Programming Microcontro 1-0-4) Laboratory Microcontrolle (2-0-0-0)
Process (3-1-0- (2020-2021)(3- ller (0-0-2-1) r Laboratory
24
4) 0-2-4) / (3-0-0-3) (0-0-2-1)
Signals and
Systems(2021-
2022)
(3-1-0-4)
V 20ECT51 20ECT52 20ECT53 Professional Open Elective 20ECL51 20ECL52 20ECL53 20GEL51/
Analog and Digital Signal Linear Integrated Elective I II (3-1/0-0/2-4) Analog and Digital Signal Linear 20GEI51
Digital Processing Circuits (3-0-0-3) Digital Processing Integrated Professional
Communi (3-0-0-3) (3-0-0-3) Communi Laboratory Circuits Skills Training I 21
cation cation Lab (0-0-2-1) Laboratory / Industrial
(3-0-0-3) (0-0-2-1) (0-0-2-1) Training I
(0-0-0-2)
VI 20ECT61 20ECT62 20ECT63 Open 20ECL61 20ECL62 20ECL63 20GEL61/ 20GEP61 20ECP61
VLSI Design Data Communi Microwave and Elective III VLSI Design Data Microwave 20GEI61 Comprehensiv Project Work I
(3-0-0-3) cation and Optical Communi (3-0-0-3) Laboratory Communicatio and Optical Professional e Test / Viva (0-0-4-2)
Networking cation (0-0-2-1) n and Internet Communi Skills Training II (0-0-0-2) 21
(3-0-0-3) (3-0-0-3) working Lab cation Lab / Industrial
(0-0-2-1) (0-0-2-1) Training II
(0-0-0-2)
VII 20GET71 20ECT71 Professional Professional Professional Professional 20ECP71
Engineering Antennas and Elective II Elective III Elective IV Elective V Project Work II
Economics and Wave (3-0-0-3) (3-0-0-3) (3-0-0-3) (3-0-0-3) Phase I 22
Management Propagation (0-0-6-3)
(3-0-0-3) (3-0-2-4)
VIII Professional Open Elective 20ECP81
Elective VI IV Project Work II
13
(3-0-0-3) (3-0-0-3) Phase II
(0-0-14-7)
MAPPING OF COURSES WITH PROGRAM OUTCOMES(PRESS BACKSPACE TO REMOVE TICK)
Course
Sem. Course Title PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Code
1 20EGT11 English Language Skills     
1 20MAC11 Matrices and Differential Equations     
1 20PHT11 Applied Physics   
1 20CYT11 Applied Chemistry    
1 20ECT11 Basics of Electrical Engineering      
1 20ECT12 Circuit Theory and Network Analysis     
1 20ECL11 Basics of Electrical Engineering Laboratory       
1 20PHL11 Physical Sciences Laboratory I 
2 20EGT21 Advanced Communication Skills     
2 20MAC21 Multivariable Calculus and Complex Analysis    
Physics for Communication and Computer Science   

2 20PHT23
Engineering
2 20CYT23 Chemistry of Electronic Materials    
2 20MEC11 Engineering Drawing         
    
2 20ECT21/ Electromagnetic Fields(2020-2021)
20CSC31
Programming in C (2021-2022)        
2 20MEL11 Engineering Practices Laboratory        
2 20PHL24 Physical Sciences Laboratory II 
2 20VEC11 Yoga Values for Holistic Development    
3 20MAT33 Linear Algebra and Transforms    
Programming in C(2020-2021/        
20CSC31/
3
20CSC41
Python Programming (2021-2022)    
Course
Code
3 20ECT31            
Digital Electronics
3 20ECT32 Solid State Devices and Circuits          
         
20ECT33/ Signals and Systems(2020-2021)/
3
20ECT21     
Electromagnetic Fields (2021-2022)
3 20ECL31 Digital Electronics Laboratory           
3 20ECL32 Solid State Devices and Circuits Laboratory            
3 20EGL31 English for Workplace Communication Laboratory   
3 20GET31 Universal Human Values     
4 20MAT43 Probability Theory and Stochastic Process    
20CSC41/ Python Programming (2020-2021) /    

4 20ECT33
Signals and Systems(2021-2022)          
4 20ECT41 Electronic Circuits         
4 20ECT42 Microprocessor and Microcontroller       
4 20ECT43 Control Engineering         
4 20ECL41 Electronic Circuits Laboratory        
4 20ECL42 Microprocessor and Microcontroller Laboratory      
4 Environmental Science   
20MNT31
5 20ECT51 Analog and Digital Communication       
5 20ECT52 Digital Signal Processing        
5 20ECT53 Linear Integrated Circuits         
5 20ECL51 Analog and Digital Communication Laboratory       
5 20ECL52 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory           
5 20ECL53 Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory          
Course
Code
5 20GEL51/ Professional Skills Training I /        
Industrial Training I
20GEI51
6 20ECT61 VLSI Design      
6 20ECT62 Data Communication and Networking       
        
6 20ECT63 Microwave and Optical Communication
6 20ECL61 VLSI Design Laboratory       
6 20ECL62 Data Communication and Networking Laboratory         
6 20ECL63 Microwave and Optical Communication Laboratory         
6 20GEL61/ Professional Skills Training II /        

Industrial Training II
20GEI61
6 20GEP61 Comprehensive Test / Viva
6 20ECP61 Project Work I              
20GET71              
7 Engineering Economics and Management
7 20ECT71 Antenna and Wave Propagation      
Sem. Course Code Course Title PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
Professional Electives
   
5 20ECE01 Transmission Lines and Waveguides
5 20ECE02 Microcontroller Based Automation          
5 20ECE03 Medical Electronics    
5 20ECE04 Computer Architecture and Interfacing     
5 20ECE05 OptoElectronics    
5 20ECE06 Soft Computational Techniques            
5 20ECE07            
Linux Operating Systems
6 20ECE08 Mobile Communication    
6 20ECE09 Embedded System Design        
6 20ECE10 Modern Electronic Instrumentation          
6 20ECE11 Electronics Circuit Board Design         
6 20ECE12 Digital Image Processing            
20ECE13       
6 ASIC Design
6 20ECE14 Network Information Security      
7 20ECE15 Wireless Broadband Communication           
7 20ECE16 Embedded IoT         
7 20ECE17 DSP Processor and its Applications         
7 20ECE18 Wavelet Transform and its Applications        
      
7 20ECE19 Testing and Fault Diagnosis of VLSI Circuits
7 20ECE20 Computer Vision       
7 20ECE21 MEMS Design          
7 Fundamentals of research
Sem. Course Code Course Title PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
7 20ECE22 Satellite Communication        
7 20ECE23 Wireless Networks       
20ECE24         
7 Real Time Operating system
7 20ECE25 Deep Learning and its Applications           
7 20ECE26 System Verilog       
7 20ECE27 Natural Language Processing     
7 20ECE28 Industry 4.0        
7 20ECE29 Next Generation Wireless Communication      
7 20ECE30 Cyber Physical Systems     
7 20ECE31 Automotive Electronic Systems        
7 20ECE32 Principles of Machine Learning      
7 20ECE33 Nano Technology For Energy Sustainability       
7 20ECE34 Software Quality Assurance and Testing       
7 20ECE35 Radar Engineering      
20ECE36       
7 RF Communications
7 20ECE37 RISC Architecture         
7 20ECE38 Remote Sensing          
7 20ECE39 Computer Design Automation for VLSI Circuits       
8 20ECE40 Blockchain Technology    
8 20ECE41 Quantum Computing and Information        
8 Entrepreneurship development
Open Elective Courses PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
5 20ECO01 Wearable Technology      
20ECO02 Basics of Electronics in Automation         

5
Appliances
5 20ECO03 Principles of Quantum Computing        
5 20ECO04 PCB Design and Fabrication        
20ECO05 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic for          

5
Engineering Applications
5 20ECO06 Electronic Hardware and Troubleshooting    
5 20ECO07 Bioinspired Computing Technologies     
5 20ECO08 Optical Engineering        
20ECO09 Neural Networks and Deep Learning with        

5
Python
5,6,7 20GEO01 German LanguageLevel 1    
5,6,7 20GEO02 Japanese LanguageLevel 1    
5,6,7 20GEO05 German Language Level 2    
5,6,7 20GEO08 Japanese Language Level 2    
B.E. DEGREE IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

CURRICULUM UNDER REGULATIONS 2020
(For the candidates admitted from academic year 2020-21 onwards)
SEMESTER – I
Course Code Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate gory

Course Title Credit
L T P CA ESE Total
Theory/Theory with Practical
20EGT11 English Language Skills 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 HS
20MAC11 Matrices and Differential Equations 3 1* 2* 4 50 50 100 BS
20PHT11 Applied Physics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 BS
20CYT11 Applied Chemistry 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 BS
20ECT11 Basics of Electrical Engineering 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 ES
20ECT12 Circuit Theory and Network Analysis 3 1 0 4 50 50 100 PC
Practical / Employability Enhancement
20ECL11 Basics of Electrical Engineering Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 ES
20PHL11 Physical Sciences Laboratory I 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 BS
20MNT11 Induction Training Program # - - - 0 100 0 100 MC
SEMESTER – II
Course Code Hours / Week Maximum Marks Category

Course Title Credit
L T P CA ESE Total
20EGT21 Advanced Communication Skills 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 HS
20MAC21 Multivariable Calculus and Complex Analysis 3 1* 2* 4 50 50 100 BS
Physics for Communication and Computer
20PHT23 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 BS
Science Engineering
20CYT23 Chemistry of Electronic Materials 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 BS
20MEC11 Engineering Drawing 2 0 2 3 50 50 100 ES
20ECT21/ Electromagnetic Fields(2020-2021) 3 1 0 PC/
4 50 50 100
20CSC31 Programming in C (2021-2022) 3 0 2 ES
20MEL11 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 ES
20PHL24 Physical Sciences Laboratory II 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 BS
20VEC11 Yoga Values for Holistic Development 1 0 1 1 100 0 100 HS
SEMESTER – III
Course Code Hours / Week Maximum Marks Cate gory

Course Title Credit
L T P CA ESE Total
20MAT33 Linear Algebra and Transforms 3 1 0 4 50 50 100 BS
20CSC31/ Programming in C(2020-2021/
3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES
20CSC41 Python Programming (2021-2022)
20ECT31 Digital Electronics 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
20ECT32 Solid State Devices and Circuits 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
20ECT33/ Signals and Systems(2020-2021)/
3 1 0 4 50 50 100 PC
20ECT21 Electromagnetic Fields (2021-2022)
20ECL31 Digital Electronics Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
20ECL32 Solid State Devices and Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
English for Workplace Communication
20EGL31 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 HS
Laboratory
20GET31 Universal Human Values 2 0 0 2 100 0 100 HS
SEMESTER – IV
Course Code Course Title Hours / Week Credit Maximum Marks Cate
gory
L T P CA ESE Total
20MAT43 Probability Theory and Stochastic Process 3 1 0 4 50 50 100 BS
20CSC41/ Python Programming (2020-2021) / 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 ES/
20ECT33 Signals and Systems(2021-2022) 3 1 0 PC
20ECT41 Electronic Circuits 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
20ECT42 Microprocessor and Microcontroller 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
20ECT43 Control Engineering 3 1 0 4 50 50 100 ES
Open Elective I 3 1 0 4 50 50 100 OE
3 0 2
20ECL41 Electronic Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
20ECL42 Microprocessor and Microcontroller Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
20MNT31 Environmental Science 2 0 0 0 100 0 100 MC

B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING CURRICULUM – R2020
SEMESTER – V
gory
L T P CA ESE Total
20ECT51 Analog and Digital Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
20ECT52 Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
20ECT53 Linear Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Professional Elective I 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Open Elective II 3 1/0 0/2 4 50 50 100 OE

20ECL51 Analog and Digital Communication Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
20ECL52 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
20ECL53 Linear Integrated Circuits Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC

20GEL51/ Professional Skills Training I /
-- -- -- 2 100 0 100 EC
20GEI51 Industrial Training I
SEMESTER – VI
gory
L T P CA ESE Total
20ECT61 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
20ECT62 Data Communication and Networking 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
20ECT63 Microwave and Optical Communication 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PC
Open Elective III 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 OE
20ECL61 VLSI Design Laboratory 0 0 2 1 100 0 100 PC
20ECL62 Data Communication and Networking Laboratory 0 0 2 1 50 50 100 PC
Microwave and Optical Communication
20ECL63 0 0 2 1 100 0 100 PC
Laboratory
20GEL61/ Professional Skills Training
- -- -- 2 100 0 100 EC
20GEI61 II / Industrial Training II
20GEP61 Comprehensive Test / Viva - --- --- 2 100 0 100 EC
20ECP61 Project Work I 0 0 4 2 100 0 100 EC

B.E. ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING CURRICULUM – R2020
SEMESTER – VII
gory
L T P CA ESE Total
20GET71 Engineering Economics and Management 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 HS
20ECT71 Antenna and Wave Propagation 3 0 2 4 50 50 100 PC
Professional Elective II 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Professional Elective III 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Professional Elective IV 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Professional Elective V 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 OE
20ECP71 Project Work II Phase I 0 0 6 3 50 50 100 EC
SEMESTER – VII
gory
L T P CA ESE Total
Professional Elective VI 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 PE
Open Elective IV 3 0 0 3 50 50 100 OE
20ECP81 Project Work II Phase II -- -- 14 7 50 50 100 EC
Total: 169
LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES

Course Hours/Week Domain/
Course Title Credit Sem
code L T P Stream
Elective I-5 SEM
20ECE01 Transmission Lines and Waveguides 3 0 0 3 V CN
20ECE02 Microcontroller Based Automation 2 0 2 3 V ES
20ECE03 Medical Electronics 3 0 0 3 V EL
20ECE04 Computer Architecture and Interfacing 3 0 0 3 V EL
20ECE05 OptoElectronics 3 0 0 3 V EL
20ECE06 Soft Computational Techniques 3 0 0 3 V SIP
20ECE07 Linux Operating Systems 2 0 0 2 V SD
Elective II- 7SEM
20ECE08 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3 VII CN
20ECE09 Embedded System Design 3 0 0 3 VII ES
20ECE10 Modern Electronic Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 VII EL
20ECE11 Electronics Circuit Board Design 2 0 2 3 VII EL
20ECE12 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 VII SIP
20ECE13 ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 VII VD
20ECE14 Network Information Security 3 0 0 3 VII CN
Elective III-7 SEM
20ECE15 Wireless Broadband Communication 3 0 0 3 VII CN
20ECE16 Embedded IoT 3 0 0 3 VII ES
20ECE17 DSP Processor and its Applications 3 0 0 3 VII SIP
20ECE18 Wavelet Transform and its Applications 3 0 0 3 VII SIP
20ECE19 Testing and Fault Diagnosis of VLSI Circuits 3 0 0 3 VII VD
20ECE20 Computer Vision 3 0 0 3 VII SD
20ECE21 MEMS Design 3 0 0 3 VII VD
Fundamentals of research 3 0 0 3 VII
Elective IV-7 SEM
20ECE22 Satellite Communication 3 0 0 3 VII CN
20ECE23 Wireless Networks 3 0 0 3 VII CN
20ECE24 Real Time Operating system 3 0 0 3 VII ES
20ECE25 Deep Learning and its Applications 3 0 0 3 VII SIP
20ECE26 System Verilog 3 0 0 3 VII VD
20ECE27 Natural Language Processing 3 0 0 3 VII SD
20ECE28 Industry 4.0 3 0 0 3 VII ES
Elective V-7 SEM
20ECE29 Next Generation Wireless Communication 3 0 0 3 VII CN
20ECE30 Cyber Physical Systems 3 0 0 3 VIII ES
20ECE31 Automotive Electronic Systems 3 0 0 3 VII EL
20ECE32 Principles of Machine Learning 3 0 0 3 VII SIP
20ECE33 Nano Technology For Energy Sustainability 2 0 2 3 VII VD
20ECE34 Software Quality Assurance and Testing 3 0 0 3 VII SD
Elective VI-8 SEM
20ECE35 Radar Engineering 3 0 0 3 VIII CN
20ECE36 RF Communications 3 0 0 3 VIII CN
20ECE37 RISC Architecture 3 0 0 3 VIII ES
20ECE38 Remote Sensing 3 0 0 3 VIII SIP
20ECE39 Computer Design Automation for VLSI Circuits 3 0 0 3 VII VD
20ECE40 Blockchain Technology 3 0 0 3 VIII SD
20ECE41 Quantum Computing and Information 3 0 0 3 VIII VD
Entrepreneurship development 3 0 0 3 VIII
* Domain/Stream Abbreviations: : EL – Electronics, VD- VLSI Design, CN- Communication & Networks, SIP –
Signal & Image Processing, ES – Embedded Systems, SD – Software Development

Course Code Course Name L T P C Sem
20ECO01 Wearable Technology 3 1 0 4 IV

20ECO02 Basics of Electronics in
3 1 0 4 IV
Automation Appliances
20ECO03 Principles of Quantum Computing 3 0 2 4 IV
20ECO04 PCB Design and Fabrication 3 0 2 4 V
20ECO05 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic
3 0 2 4 V
for Engineering Applications
20ECO06 Electronic Hardware and
2 0 2 3 VI
Troubleshooting
20ECO07 Bioinspired Computing
2 0 2 3 VI
Technologies
20ECO08 Optical Engineering 3 0 0 3 VIII
20ECO09 Neural Networks and Deep
2 0 2 3 VIII
Learning with Python
LIST OF OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED TO OTHER DEPARTMENTS

(Common to all BE/BTech branches including ECE branch)
Hours/Week
Course Name L T P
20GEO01 German LanguageLevel 1 3 1 0 4 V/VI/VII/VII
20GEO02 Japanese LanguageLevel 1 3 1 0 4 V/VI/VII/VII

The total credits for the BE (ECE Branch) programme is 169 with the following curriculum breakdown structure:
% out of total
S.No. Category Credits
credits
1. Humanities and Social Sciences (HS) : 13 7.7
2. Basic Sciences (BS) : 30 17.7
3. Engineering Sciences (ES) : 20 11.8
4. Professional Core (PC) : 56 33.1
5. Professional Electives (PE) : 18 10.6
6. Open Electives (OE) : 14 8.3
7. Employability Enhancement Courses (EC) : 18 10.6
Mandatory Courses(Induction
8. (MC): 2 1.2
Programme, Environmental Science)
Total : 169 100 %
20EGT11 ENGLISH LANGUAGE SKILLS
(Common to all Engineering and Technology Branches)
Programme &
All BE/BTech branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1 HS 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course is designed to impart required levels of fluency in using the English Language at A2/B1
Level in the Common European Framework (CEFR).
Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing and Grammar & Vocabulary. Activity Based Learning
Unit - I 9
– Phase – I
Listening - Talking about past experiences - listening to descriptions - Speaking - Exchanging personal information -
Talking about cities and transportation - Reading - Life and achievements of a famous personality - Global transport
systems - Writing - Childhood experiences - Process Description – Grammar & Vocabulary – Past tense –
Expressions of quantity – Indirect questions.
Unit - II 9
– Phase – II
Listening - Information about hotels and accommodation - Recipes and food items - Speaking - Life style changes
and making comparisons - Talking about food - Reading - Habit formation and changing habits - International
cuisine - Writing - Personal email - emails about food and recipes – Grammar & Vocabulary – Evaluations and
Comparisons with adjectives – Simple past and present perfect tenses.
Unit - III 9
– Phase – III
Listening - Information about travel - descriptions / conversations about family life - Speaking - Vacations and
Holidays - Requests, complaints and offering explanations - Reading - Tourist places and travel experiences - Group
behaviour and politeness - Writing - Personal letter about travelling - Writing guidelines and checklists – Grammar &
Vocabulary – Future tense – Modals – Two-part verbs.
Unit - IV Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing and Grammar & Vocabulary. Activity Based Learning
9
– Phase – IV
Listening - Descriptions about festivals - Presentations on technology - Speaking - About technology - festivals,
special events and traditions - Reading - Sports, hobbies and past time - About different cultures - Writing - Product
Description - Writing web content – Grammar & Vocabulary – Infinitives and Gerunds for uses and purposes –
Imperatives for giving suggestions – Relative clauses of time.
Unit - V 9
– Phase – V
Listening - Talking about changes - Job preferences - Speaking - Comparing different periods or phases in life –
Changes that happen - Skills and abilities, Personality Development - Employability Skills – Reading - Reading
about life experiences - Emotions and feelings – Job preferences – Jobs and Personality – Writing - Writing about
one’s past, present and future – Researching job options – Choosing the right job – Grammar & Vocabulary – Time
contrasts – Conditional sentences with “if clauses” – Gerunds – short responses.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jack C. Richards, Jonathan Hull, and Susan Proctor, “Interchange - Student’s Book 2”, 4th Edition, Cambridge
University Press, New York, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata, “Communication Skills”, 2 nd Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Pamela Hartmann and Brenda Wegmann, “New Interactions English Language Learning and Assessment
Platform ( Level Intro - Level IV )”, McGraw Hill India, 2020.
COURSE OUTCOMES: BT Mapped

On completion of the course, the students will be able to (Highest Level)
CO1 use language effectively and accurately acquiring vocabulary from real-life context Applying (K3)
CO2 listen/view and comprehend different spoken discourses / excerpts in different accents Applying (K3)
CO3 read different genres of texts adopting various reading strategies Analyzing (K4)
CO4 write cohesively, coherently and flawlessly avoiding grammatical errors, using a wide range Creating (K6)
of vocabulary, organizing their ideas logically on a topic
CO5 speak clearly, confidently, comprehensibly and communicate with others using appropriate Creating (K6)
communicative strategies
Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs

COs/POs PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 2 2 3 2 2
CO2 2 3 1
CO3 1 3 1 1
CO4 3 1
CO5 2 3 2
1 – Slight, 2 – Moderate, 3 – Substantial, BT- Bloom’s Taxonomy
ASSESSMENT PATTERN - THEORY

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating
Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 16 30 37 17 100
CAT2 17 30 37 16 100
CAT3 13 33 37 17 100
ESE 7 21 37 35 100
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1,2,3 – 50 marks & ESE – 100 marks)
20MAC11 - MATRICES AND DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
(Common to All Engineering and Technology Branches)
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1 BS 3 1* 2* 4
Preamble To provide the skills to the students for solving different real time problems by applying matrices and
differential equations.
Unit - I Matrices: 9
Introduction – Characteristic equation – Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a real matrix – Properties of Eigen values
and Eigen vectors (without proof) – Cayley - Hamilton theorem (Statement and applications only) – Orthogonal
matrices – Orthogonal transformation of a symmetric matrix to diagonal form – Quadratic form – Nature of Quadratic
forms - Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation.
Unit - II Ordinary Differential Equations: 9
Introduction – Solutions of First order differential equations: Exact differential equations – Leibnitz’s Linear Equation
– Bernoulli's equation – Clairaut's equation.
Unit - III Ordinary Differential Equations of Higher Order: 9
Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients - Particular Integrals for the types:
eax – cosax / sinax – xn – eaxxn, eaxsinbx and eaxcosbx – xnsinax and xncosax – Differential Equations with variable
coefficients: Euler-Cauchy’s equation – Legendre’s equation.
Unit - IV Applications of Ordinary Differential Equations: 9
Method of variation of parameters – Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients –
Applications of differential equations: Simple harmonic motion – Electric circuits (Differential equations and
associated conditions need to be given).
Unit - V Laplace Transform & Inverse Laplace Transform: 9
Laplace Transform: Conditions for existence – Transform of elementary functions – Basic properties – Derivatives
and integrals of transforms – Transforms of derivatives and integrals – Transform of unit step function – Transform
of periodic functions. Inverse Laplace transform: Inverse Laplace transform of elementary functions – Partial
fraction method – Convolution theorem (Statement only) – Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant
coefficients.
List of Exercises / Experiments:

1. Introduction to MATLAB
2. Computation of eigen values and eigen vectors
3. Plotting and visualizing single variable functions
4. Solving first and second order ordinary differential equations
5. Solution of Simultaneous first order ODEs
6. Solving second order ODE by variation of parameters
7. Determining Laplace and inverse Laplace transform of basic functions
8. Solution of Second order ODE by employing Laplace transforms
*Alternate week
Lecture: 45, Tutorial and Practical:15, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
1. Ravish R. Singh, Mukul Bhatt “Engineering Mathematics”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Kreyszig E., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 10th Edition, John Wiley Sons, 2011.
2. Kandasamy P., Thilagavathy K. and Gunavathy K., “Engineering Mathematics For First Year B.E/B.Tech”,
Reprint Edition 2014, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi.
3. Duraisamy C., Vengataasalam S., Arun Prakash K. and Suresh M., “Engineering Mathematics – I”, 2nd Edition,
Pearson India Education, New Delhi, 2018.

CO1 solve engineering problems which needs matrix computations. Applying (K3)
CO2 identify the appropriate method for solving first order ordinary differential equations. Applying (K3)
CO3 solve higher order linear differential equations with constant and variable coefficients. Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the concept of ordinary differential equations for modeling and finding solutions to Applying (K3)
engineering problems.
CO5 apply Laplace Transform to find solutions of Linear Ordinary Differential Equations Applying (K3)
CO6 know the basics of MATLAB and computing eigen values and eigen vectors of real matrix Understanding
by MATLAB. (K2),
Manipulation (S2)
CO7 solve ordinary differential equations with constant and variable coefficients and Applying (K3),
simultaneous first order ordinary differential equations using MATLAB. Manipulation (S2)
CO8 compute Laplace and inverse Laplace Transform of basic functions and solve Second Applying (K3),
Order ODE by using Laplace Transform with MATLAB. Manipulation (S2)

CO1 3 3 2 1
CO2 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 1
CO6 3
CO7 3
CO8 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 20 70 100
CAT2 10 20 70 100
CAT3 10 20 70 100
ESE 10 20 70 100
20PHT11 - APPLIED PHYSICS
Programme &
All BE/BTech Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1 BS 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course aims to impart the essential concepts of propagation of elastic waves, acoustics,
ultrasonics, laser and fiber optics, quantum physics, crystal structure and crystal defects. It also
describes the physical phenomena related to the aforementioned concepts and their applications in
engineering and provides motivation towards innovations
Unit - I Propagation of Elastic Waves: 9
Oscillatory Motion: Introduction to simple harmonic motion - Damping velocity - Damping coefficient - Differential
equation of simple harmonic motion - Velocity and acceleration - Restoring force - Vibration of a spring and mass
system - Frequency response - Phase response - Resonance - Wave motion: Definition of a plane progressive
wave - Attenuation of waves - Differential equation of a plane progressive wave - Phase velocity - Phase and phase
difference - Solution of the differential equation of a plane progressive wave.
Unit - II Acoustics and Ultrasonics: 9
Acoustics: Introduction - Reverberation and reverberation time - Growth and decay of sound - Sabine’s formula for
reverberation time – Determination of sound absorption coefficient – Design of an auditorium: Factors affecting
acoustics of buildings and the remedies. Ultrasonics: Introduction – Properties of ultrasonic waves – Generation of
ultrasonic waves: Magnetostrictive generator and Piezoelectric generator - Determination of velocity of ultrasonics in
a liquid: Acoustic grating – Industrial application: Non-destructive testing - Other applications of ultrasonic waves
(qualitative).
Unit - III Laser and Fiber Optics: 9
Laser and Applications: Introduction – Interaction of light with matter - Three quantum process: Stimulated
absorption, spontaneous emission and stimulated emission - Population inversion - Einstein’s coefficients and their
relations - Pumping methods - Nd:YAG laser - CO2 laser - Holography. Fiber Optics and Applications: Introduction -
Numerical aperture and acceptance angle - Classification of optical fibers based on refractive index, modes and
materials - Fiber optics communication system (qualitative) - Fiber optic sensors: Temperature and displacement
sensors.
Unit - IV Quantum Physics: 9
Introduction - Blackbody radiation - Planck’s quantum hypothesis - Compton scattering (qualitative) - de Broglie’s
hypothesis - Properties of matter waves - Application of Heisenberg uncertainty principle - Schrodinger’s time
independent and time dependent wave equations - Physical significance of wave function - The free particle -
Potential energy step - Infinite potential well (one - dimensional).
Unit - V Crystal Physics: 9
Introduction - Classification of solids - Space lattice - Crystal structure - Unit cell - Bravais lattice - Single and
polycrystalline materials - Lattice planes - Miller indices - Indices of crystal direction - Interplanar spacing in cubic
system - Hexagonal close packed crystal structure and c/a ratio - Symmetry -Symmetry elements in cubic crystal -
Crystal imperfections: line, surface and volume imperfections - Features of crystal imperfections (qualitative).
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Avadhanulu M.N., Kshirsagar P.G. and Arun Murthy T.V.S., “A Textbook of Engineering Physics”,11th Edition, S.
Chand & Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Purnima Khare and Swarup A.,”Engineering Physics: Fundamentals and Modern Applications”, 1st Edition,
Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Sudbury, Massachusetts, 2009.
2. Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L., “Engineering Physics”, 8th Edition, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 2009.
3. Tamilarasan K. and Prabu K., “Engineering Physics – I”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2014.

CO1 make use of the concepts of oscillatory and wave motion to comprehend the Applying (K3)
phenomena related to the propagation of elastic waves.
CO2 apply the concepts of growth and decay of sound energy in a hall to compute Sabine’s Applying (K3)
formula to recognize the requirements of acoustically good buildings, and to describe the
production of ultrasonic wave, working of acoustic grating & non-destructive testing
using ultrasonic waves.
CO3 apply the concepts of stimulated emission to explain the working and the applications of Applying (K3)
laser in engineering and technology, and to apply the principle of propagation of light
through optical fiber to compute acceptance angle and numerical aperture to
comprehend the loss in optical fiber, fiber optic communication system and working of
fiber optic sensors.
CO4 use the concepts of quantum mechanics to describe the behavior of electrons in a metal Applying (K3)
by solving Schrodinger’s wave equation for particle motion in infinite potential well.
CO5 utilize the concepts of the seven crystal systems to obtain interplanar spacing in cubic Applying (K3)
lattice and c/a ratio of HCP crystal structure, and to comprehend symmetry elements,
reciprocal lattice and the types of crystal imperfections and their impacts.

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 20 35 45 100
CAT3 25 35 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
20CYT11 - APPLIED CHEMISTRY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble Applied Chemistry course explores the basic principles and advancements of chemistry in the field of
engineering and technology. It aims to impart the fundamentals of chemistry towards innovations in
science and technology and also for societal applications.
Unit - I Water Technology: 9
Introduction - sources of water - impurities in water - types of water - hardness of water- expression of hardness
(simple problems) - units of hardness –estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method – determination of alkalinity
- disadvantages of using hard water in Industries - boiler troubles - scale and sludge, boiler corrosion, caustic
embrittlement, priming and foaming - softening of water: i) Internal treatment process - carbonate and calgon
conditioning ii) External treatment method -demineralization process iii) Treatment of water for municipal water
supply (Removal of suspended particles and disinfection methods, Break-point of chlorination).
Unit - II Electrochemistry: 9
Introduction – electrochemical cells - applications of electrochemical series - reference electrode - standard calomel
electrode - ion selective electrode - glass electrode - concentration cells - electrode and electrolyte concentration
cells (simple problems) -applications- potentiometric titrations - acid-base, redox, precipitation titrations -
advantages- conductometric titrations - strong acid vs strong base, weak acid vs strong base, mixture of weak and
strong acid vs strong base- advantages of conductometric titrations.
Unit - III Corrosion and its Control: 9
Introduction – causes and effects of corrosion - types of corrosion - chemical corrosion – Pilling Bed-worth rule -
electrochemical corrosion –types - galvanic corrosion, concentration cell corrosion – other types of corrosion -stress,
intergranular and microbiological corrosion- galvanic series - factors influencing rate of corrosion – corrosion control
methods - design and material selection, anodic protection, corrosion inhibitors, protective coatings - i) metallic
coatings : hot dipping (tinning and galvanizing) ii) non-metallic coating : anodizing iii) organic coating : paints –
constituents and their functions.
Unit - IV Fuels and Combustion: 9
Introduction – classification of fuels - characteristics of a good fuel - combustion - calorific values – gross and net
calorific values - Dulong‘s formula (simple problems) - Flue gas analysis by Orsat‘s method - ignition temperature -
spontaneous ignition temperature - explosive range - solid fuels - coal and its varieties – proximate and ultimate
analysis – significance – metallurgical coke - Otto-Hoffman byproduct method - liquid fuel - refining of petroleum –
manufacture of synthetic petrol - hydrogenation of coal - Bergius process - knocking - octane number – cetane
number - gaseous fuel - water gas.
Unit - V Polymers: 9
Introduction – terminology - classification - polymerization - types of polymerization (definition only)- polymerisation
techniques- bulk, solution, suspension and emulsion polymerisation - plastics- difference between thermoplastics
and thermosetting plastics - compounding of plastics- plastic moulding methods - compression, injection, extrusion
and blow moulding methods - industrial polymers: preparation, properties and applications of PVC, PAN,
polyurethane, polyesters –biodegradable polymers-classification and applications.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Wiley Editorial Board, ”Wiley Engineering Chemistry”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Reprint 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A.& Manjula Rani K., “Applied Chemistry”, 6 th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, 2019.
2. Payal B. Joshi, Shashank Deep, “Engineering Chemistry”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2019.
3. Palanna O., “Engineering Chemistry”, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2017.

CO1 apply the suitable water softening methods to avoid boiler troubles. Applying (K3)
CO2 apply the principle of electrochemistry for various applications. Applying (K3)
CO3 make use of corrosion control methods to solve corrosion related problems. Applying (K3)
CO4 illustrate the quality of fuels from its characteristics. Understanding (K2)
CO5 explain the types of polymers, plastics and fabrication methods. Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 1
CO5 3 1

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 25 35 40 100
CAT2 25 35 40 100
CAT3 25 35 40 100
ESE 25 35 40 100
20ECT11 - BASICS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Programme & BE – Electronics and Communication

Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch Engineering
Prerequisites NIL 1 ES 3 0 0 3
Preamble To gain base knowledge and develop simple models of Electric generating station with safety measure
and demonstrate the background details.
Unit - I Introduction to Power Engineering and Storage: 9
Electrical power sources - basics: hydroelectric, thermal, nuclear, Wind, Solar; Basics of batteries and their uses.
Storage: Batteries, Types and their Uses.
Unit - II DC Machines and Measuring Instruments: 9
DC Motors and DC Generators: Construction, Types, EMF equation, Characteristics and Applications. Moving Iron
and Moving Coil Instrument, Dynamometer type Wattmeter, Induction Type Energy Meter.
Unit - III Transformers: 9
Construction, Principle of Operation, and EMF equation, Transformer on: No Load and Load; Losses and Efficiency
and Applications. Transformer Connections: Single phase and Three Phase connections.
Unit - IV AC Machines: 9
Induction Motor (3-Phase and 1-Phase) and Synchronous Motor, and Stepper Motor - Construction, Principle of
Operation, Characteristics, Types and Applications.
Unit - V House Wiring and Safety: 9
Phase, Neutral and Earth. Basic Housing Wiring. Tools and Components, Different types of Wiring, Stair case,
Fluorescent lamp, Ceiling Fan, Basic Safety Measures at Home and Industry: Earthing-Pipe and Plate, Grounding
terms and Cardio Pulmanory Resuscitation(CPR).
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jegathesan V., Vinoth Kumar K. and Saravanakumar R., “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, Wiley
India Private Limited, New Delhi, Reprint 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Edward Huges, “Electrical and Electronics Technology”, 12th Edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall, Harlow, England,
Newyork, 2016.
2. Mehta V.K., Rohit Mehta, “Principles of Electrical Engineering and Electronics”, 3rd Edition, S-Chand
Publications, New Delhi, 2014.

CO1 understand the sources of Power Generation and its operations Understanding (K2)
CO2 paraphrase and distinguish motor and generation action and understand the Basic
Applying(K3)
Measuring Instruments
CO3 comprehend the construction and working of transformers and its testing procedure. Applying(K3)
CO4 discuss the details of construction and operation AC machines Applying(K3)
CO5 deliberate on wiring circuit construction accessories and safety Procedure and Applying(K3)
measures.

CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 3 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 55 5 100
CAT2 40 50 10 100
CAT3 30 60 10 100
ESE 40 50 10 100
20ECT12 - CIRCUIT THEORY AND NETWORK ANALYSIS
Programme & B.E.- Electronics and Communication

Branch Engineering
Prerequisites Nil 1 PC 3 1 0 4
Preamble This course provides an insight on basic laws and theorems to solve different DC ,AC circuits and
networks and to expose them to the rudiments of the course which is essential for subsequent courses.
Unit - I DC Circuit Analysis: 9+3
Review of Current Electricity and basic Kirchoff's Laws- Star-Delta Transformation -Mesh analysis-Nodal analysis-
Superposition Theorem-Thevenin Theorem, Norton Theorem-Maximum Power Transfer Theorem
Unit - II AC Circuit Analysis: 9+3
Review of AC concepts-Mesh Analysis-Nodal Analysis -Superposition Theorem-Thevenin Theorem, Norton
Theorem-Maximum Power Transfer Theorem
Unit - III Transient Analysis: 9+3
Complex Impedance and Phasor Diagram-Review-Basic Laplace Transforms-DC response of RL,RC and RLC
Circuits, Sinusoidal Response of RL, RC and RLC circuits.
Unit - IV Resonance and Coupled Circuits: 9+3
Series Resonance-Impedance and Phase Angle of a Series Resonant Circuit-Voltages and Currents in a Series
Resonant Circuit-Bandwidth of an RLC circuit-Quality Factor(Q) and its Effect on Bandwidth-Parallel Resonance-
Resonant Frequency for a Tank Circuit- Q-Factor of Parallel Resonance. Introduction to coupled circuits-Self
Inductance and Mutual Inductance.
Unit - V Two Port Networks: 9+3
Two-port Network-Open-Circuit Impedance (Z) Parameters-Short-Circuit Admittance (Y) Parameters-Transmission
(ABCD) Parameters-Hybrid (H) Parameters-Inter-Relationships of different Parameters and its analysis-
Interconnection of Two-port Network-Lattice Network.
Lecture:45, Tutorial:15, Total: 60

TEXT BOOK:
1. Sudhakar A. and Shyammohan S. Palli, “Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis”, 5th Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Hayt W.H., Kemmerly J.E., Durbin S.M., “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2013.
2. Ravish R. Singh, “Electrical Networks”, 14th Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2016.

CO1 make Use of Various theorems and obtain reduced DC Circuits. Applying (K3)
CO2 apply various network theorems and reduce the complicated AC circuits. Applying (K3)
CO3 analyse circuit transisents for RL,RC and RLC circuits. Analysing (K4)
CO4 apply condition for resonance in series and parallel circuits to find the various Applying (K3)
parameters.
CO5 determine the various parameters in a Two Port network. Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 20 70 - 100
CAT2 10 10 70 10 100
CAT3 5 15 80 - 100
ESE 5 10 70 15 100
20ECL11 - BASICS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
Programme & BE – Electronics and Communication
Branch Engineering
Prerequisites Nil 1 ES 0 0 2 1
Preamble To apply the knowledge gained on basic electrical machines with safety measures.

1. Multi-meter Usage and Testing for Basic Circuit Elements.
2. Simple Electric Circuit Making: Fluorescent lamp and Staircase Wiring.
3. Safety : Demo: First Aid - CPR
4. Magnetic Circuit Analogue to Electric Circuit. - Demo. DC and AC Machines Parts Identifications.
5. Load Test on Series Motor.
6. Load Test on Single Phase Transformer.
7. Measurement of Earth Resistance.
8. Three Phase Transformer Terminal Connections and Calculations (Star and Delta)
9. Identifying the parts of Table/Ceiling fan, Troubleshooting and Repairing it.
10. Making a Reduced Model of Electric Power Generation Station or the Machines Associated.
Total:30
REFERENCES/MANUALS/SOFTWARES:
1. Laboratory Manual

CO1 perform the testing procedure on DC motors, transformers with its connection for its Applying (K3),
operation under loaded condition. Precision (S3)
CO2 model a scaled / reduced version of a generating station with learning of safety ground Applying (K3),
measures and perform first aid general cpr procedure. Precision (S3)
CO3 identify machineries parts, construct, test, and evaluate - simple lighting circuits. Applying (K3),
Manipulation
(S2)

CO1 3 2 2 1 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 2
20PHL11 – PHYSICAL SCIENCES LABORATORY I
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites NIL 1 BS 0 0 2 1
Preamble This course aims to impart hands on training in the determination of the physical parameters such as
Young’s modulus, rigidity modulus, frequency of vibration, velocity of ultrasonic waves, compressibility of
water, wavelength of laser, acceptance angle and the numerical aperture of an optical fiber, and to
develop the skills in handling different basic instruments and also aims to impart the basic concepts of
volumetric, conductometric and pH meter experiments and thereby, to improve the analytical capability.

1. Determination of the Young’s modulus of the material of a given beam using uniform bending method.
2. Determination of the rigidity modulus of the material of a given wire using torsional pendulum.
3. Determination of frequency of electrically vibrating rod by forming standing waves using Melde’s apparatus.
4. Determination of the velocity of ultrasonic waves in a liquid and the compressibility of a liquid using ultrasonic
interferometer.
5. Determination of (i) the wavelength of a semiconductor laser and (ii) the acceptance angle and the numerical
aperture of a given optical fiber.
6. Estimation of total, temporary and permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.
7. Estimation of Ca2+and Mg2+hardness separately by EDTA method.
8. Estimation of alkalinity of the given water sample.
9. Conductometric titration -Mixture of acids.
10. Estimation of hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
Total: 30
REFERENCES:
1. Tamilarasan K. and Prabu K.,”Physics Laboratory Manual’, 1st Edition, SCM Publishers, Erode, 2020.
2. Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A. and Manjula Rani K., ”Chemistry Laboratory Manual”, 1 st Edition,
Rajaganapathy Publishers, Erode, 2020.

CO1 determine the Young’s modulus of a material using the concepts of elasticity and bending Applying (K3),
moment of a beam and to determine the rigidity modulus of a wire using the concepts of Precision (S3)
twisting couple and to compute the frequency of electrically vibrating rod using the concept
of standing waves formed in fixed vibrating string.
CO2 determine the wavelength of a semiconductor laser beam using the concept of diffraction of Applying (K3),
light, and to compute the acceptance angle and the numerical aperture of an optical fiber Precision (S3)
using the concepts of total internal reflection and divergence of light in air and estimate the
amount of hardness for the given water sample by EDTA method, and the amount of
alkalinity for the given water sample.
CO3 demonstrate the conductivity meter and pH meter to estimate the amount of the given Applying (K3),
solution. Precision (S3)

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
20EGT21 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SKILLS
(Common to all Engineering and Technology Branches)
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites 20EGT11 – English Language Skills 2 HS 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course is designed to impart required levels of fluency in using the English Language at B1Level in
the Common European Framework (CEFR).
Unit - I 9
– Phase –VI
Listening – Job and career related descriptions and conversations – requests of different kinds and the responses –
Speaking - Career choices and professional skills – making requests and responding to requests – Reading –
Using texts about jobs and careers – about different societies and cultural differences – Writing – Resumes, CVs
and job oriented advertisements – business and career related emails – Grammar &Vocabulary – Gerunds and
elements of comparison – requests and indirect requests.
Unit - II 9
– Phase – VII
Listening – Expository and narrative descriptions – information about different cultures, nations and societies.
Speaking – Narrating and describing – talking about other countries and other cultures – Reading – Using texts
about media and information technology – living abroad and experiencing different cultures – Writing – Blog writing
– brochures and tourist pamphlets – Grammar & Vocabulary – The past tense forms - noun phrases and relative
clauses.
Unit - III 9
– Phase – VIII
Listening – Consumerism – product description – complaints and redressal – environmental issues – ecology –
saving the planet – Speaking – Talking about problems, issues, complaints – solutions and redressal – talking
about environmental issues – Reading – Using texts on segregating wastes – recycling and reusing – texts on
environmental issues – Writing – Online reviews, articles and writing web content – Grammar & Vocabulary –
Phrases and sentences used for describing problems – passives – prepositions and infinitives.
Unit - IV Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing and Grammar & Vocabulary. Activity Based Learning
9
– Phase – IX
Listening – Education, learning and the choice of courses – various services needed in daily life – self-
improvement for success in life – Speaking - Discussions about educational and career oriented issues – talking
about everyday services – giving advice and self improvement – Reading – Reading about learning strategies and
learning styles – using texts about personality development – Writing – Writing about hobbies – pastime and
individual skills – writing short articles on everyday life and personality development – Grammar & Vocabulary –
Using of “would” and certain gerund forms – use of modals, verbs, gerunds, negative questions and infinitives.
Unit - V 9
– Phase – X
Listening – Historical narratives – biographies and learning about the future – important life events, milestones and
happenings of the past – Speaking – Talking about the past, present and the future – talking about important events
in life – Reading – Texts about new technologies and future science – using texts about social organization, culture
and social practices – Writing – Biographical sketches – historical events – famous personalities, stages of life and
getting along with people – Grammar & Vocabulary – Future tense forms – time clauses and certain “if clauses”.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jack C. Richards, Jonathan Hull, and Susan Proctor, “Interchange - Student’s Book 3”, 4th Edition, Cambridge
REFERENCES:
1. Sanjay Kumar and Pushp Lata, “Communication Skills: A Workbook based on AICTE Syllabus”, Oxford
University Press, 2018.
2. Board of Editors, “Skills Annexe: Functional English for Success”, Orient BlackSwan, Hyderabad, 2013.

CO1 use functional grammar for improving communication skills Applying (K3)
CO2 listen and comprehend different spoken excerpts critically and infer Unspoken and implied Applying (K3)
meanings.
CO3 read different genres of texts, infer implied meanings and critically analyze and evaluate Analyzing (K4)
them for ideas as well as for method of presentation.
CO4 write effectively and persuasively and produce different types of writing such as narration, Creating (K6)
description, exposition and argument as well as creative, critical, analytical and evaluative
writing.
CO5 speak effectively, to express opinions clearly, initiate and sustain a discussion and also Creating (K6)
negotiate using appropriate communicative strategies.

CO1 2 1 3 1 1
CO2 2 3 1
CO3 1 3 1 1
CO4 3 2
CO5 2 3 2

Test / Bloom’s Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating Total
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 13 30 33 - 17 100
CAT2 13 33 37 - 17 100
CAT3 20 30 33 - 17 100
ESE 6 40 36 - 18 100
20MAC21 MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS AND COMPLEX ANALYSIS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 2 BS 3 1* 2* 4
Preamble To impart the knowledge of partial derivatives, evaluation of real and complex integrals, vector
calculus and analytic functions to the students for solving the problems related to various
engineering disciplines.
Unit - I Functions of Several Variables: 9
Functions of two or more variables – Partial derivatives – Total differential – Taylor’s series for functions
of two variables – Maxima and minima – Constrained maxima and minima – Lagrange’s multiplier
method
Unit - II Multiple Integrals: 9
Double integration in cartesian coordinates – Change of order of integration – Application: Area between
two curves – Triple integration in cartesian coordinates –Volume as triple integrals
Unit - III Vector Calculus: 9
Directional derivative – Gradient of a scalar point function – Divergence of a vector point function – Curl
of a vector – Solenoidal and Irrotational vectors – Green’s, Stoke’s and Gauss divergence theorems
(without proof) – Verification of the above theorems and evaluation of integrals using them.
Unit - IV Analytic Functions: 9
Functions of a complex variable – Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions (excluding
proof) – Cauchy–Riemann equations (Statement only) – Properties of analytic function (Statement only)
– Harmonic function – Construction of analytic function – Conformal mapping: w = z + a, az, 1/z –
Bilinear transformation.
Unit - V Complex Integration: 9
Introduction – Cauchy’s theorem (without proof) – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent
series – Singularities – Classification – Cauchy’s residue theorem (without proof) – Applications:
Evaluation of definite integrals involving sine and cosine functions over the circular contour.

1. Finding ordinary and partial derivatives
2. Computing extremes of a single variable function
3. Evaluating double and triple integrals
4. Finding the area between two curves
5. Computing gradient, divergence and curl of point functions
6. Applying Milne-Thomson method for constructing analytic function
7. Determination of Mobius transformation for the given set of points
8. Finding poles and residues of an analytic function
*Alternate week
Lecture: 45, Tutorial and Practical:15, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
1. Ravish R. Singh, Mukul Bhatt “Engineering Mathematics”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Kreyszig E., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 10th Edition, John Wiley Sons, 2011.
2. Dass H K, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 3rd Revised Edition, S.Chand and Co., New Delhi,
2014.
3. Duraisamy C., Vengataasalam S., Arun Prakash K. and Suresh M., “Engineering Mathematics – I”, 2nd Edition,
Pearson India Education, New Delhi, 2018.
4. MATLAB Manual.

CO1 compute extremal values which arise in function of several variables. Applying (K3)
CO2 solve Problems involving Double and Triple integrals. Understanding (K2)
CO3 apply the concept of vectors in engineering problems. Applying (K3)
CO4 identify, construct and apply analytic functions in electrostatics and fluid Applying (K3)
flow problems.
CO5 evaluate complex integrals which are extensively applied in engineering. Applying (K3)
CO6 compute maxima and minima of a single variable function, gradient, curl Understanding (K2),
and divergence of a vector function using MATLAB. Manipulation (S2)
CO7 evaluate Double, Triple integrals and determine area between two curves Applying (K3),
using MATLAB Manipulation (S2)
CO8 construct analytic function, find bilinear transformation and compute poles Applying (K3),
and residues using MATLAB. Manipulation (S2)

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 3 2
CO6 3
CO7 3
CO8 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 20 70 100
CAT2 10 20 70 100
CAT3 10 20 70 100
ESE 10 20 70 100
20PHT23 PHYSICS FOR COMMUNICATION AND COMPUTER SCIENCE ENGINEERING
(Common to Electronics and Communication Engineering, Computer Science and Engineering and
Information Technology branches)
BE, Electronics and Communication

Programme &
Engineering, BE-Computer Science and Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Engineering, BTech- Information Technology
Prerequisites Applied Physics 2 BS 3 0 0 3
Preamble This course aims to impart the knowledge on the physics of conductors, superconductors,
semiconductors, magnetic materials, dielectrics, optoelectronic materials and nano materials. It also
describes the working of the select solid state and optoelectronic devices and the applications of
aforementioned materials in Communication Engineering and Computer Science and Engineering and
Information Technology and provides motivation towards innovations.
Unit - I Conducting and Superconducting Materials: 9
Conducting Materials: Introduction - Classical free electron theory of metals - Electrical conductivity - Drawbacks of
classical free electron theory - Quantum free electron theory - Quantum statistics: Fermi distribution function and
Effect of temperature on Fermi function - Superconducting Materials: Introduction - Properties of superconductors -
Type I and Type II superconductors - Applications: Cryotron - Superconducting quantum interference device
(SQUID).
Unit - II Semiconducting Materials and Devices: 9
Introduction - Intrinsic semiconductor: Carrier concentration, Fermi level in intrinsic semiconductor, Variation of
intrinsic conductivity with temperature and Determination of band gap - Extrinsic semiconductor: Carrier
concentration in N-type and P-type semiconductors, Fermi level in Extrinsic semiconductors, Variation of Fermi level
with temperature and impurity concentration - Hall effect: Determination of Hall coefficient and its applications - Uni-
junction Transistor: Construction and characteristics – Junction field Effect Transistor: Construction and
characteristics.
Unit - III Magnetic and Dielectric Materials: 9
Magnetic materials: Introduction - Classification of magnetic materials based on magnetic moment -
Ferromagnetism: Domain theory of ferromagnetism, Hysteresis loss, Soft and hard magnetic materials and
Application: Transformer core. Dielectrics Materials: Introduction - Dielectric constant - Types of polarization
(qualitative) - Temperature dependence of polarization - Frequency dependence of total polarization - Dielectric loss
(qualitative) - Dielectric breakdown – Ferroelectricity and its applications.
Unit - IV Optoelectronic Materials and Devices: 9
Introduction - Photodetectors: p-i-n photo diode - Avalanche photo diode – Effect of Anisotropic crystals in light
propagation: Index ellipsoid of uniaxial and biaxial crystals -Electro-Optic effect: Pockel’s effect and Kerr effect -
Light modulators - Types of light modulators - Electro refractive modulators: Electro-optic amplitude and Phase
modulators - Electro absorptive modulators: Franz - Keldysh and Stark effect modulators.
Unit - V Nano Materials: 9
Introduction - Properties of nano-materials - Low dimensional structures: Quantum dot, quantum wire and quantum
well - Production techniques: Ball Milling, lithographic method, physical vapor deposition method, chemical vapor
deposition method and sol gel method - Applications of nano-materials – Carbon nanotubes: Structures, properties,
synthesis by laser ablation method - Applications of carbon nanotubes.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Avadhanulu M.N., Kshirsagar P.G. and Arun Murthy T.V.S., “A Textbook of Engineering Physics”, 11th Edition, S.
Chand & Company Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2019 for Unit I, II, III and Unit V.
2. Palanisamy P.K., “Semiconductor Physics and Opto electronics”, 2nd Edition, Sci Tech Publications, Chennai,
2010, for Unit IV.
REFERENCES:
1. Kachhava C.M., “Solid State Physics, Solid State Device and Electronics”, 1st Edition, New Age International,
New Delhi, 2003.
2. Charles Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 8th Edition, John Wiley& Sons, New Jersey, 2004.
3. Tamilarasan K. and Prabu K., “Materials Science”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2019.
CO1 apply the concepts of classical and quantum free electron theory of metals to compute Applying (K3)
the electrical conductivity of metals and to comprehend the effect of temperature on
Fermi function and to summarize the types, properties and applications of
superconductors (Cryotron and Superconducting quantum interference device).
CO2 use the concept of density of states to compute the carrier concentration, electrical Applying (K3)
conductivity and band gap of intrinsic semiconductors and to compute the carrier
concentration of extrinsic semiconductors, and also to explain the phenomenon related
to Hall Effect and the working of UJT and JFET.
CO3 apply the domain theory of ferromagnetism to explain hysteresis and to apply the Applying (K3)
concept of electric dipole moment and electric polarization to comprehend the select
polarization mechanisms in dielectrics and to describe the related phenomenon.
CO4 apply the theory of photoconductivity and p-n junction to describe the materials, Applying (K3)
construction, working and applications of the select optoelectronic devices and to apply
the concept of index ellipsoid of uniaxial and biaxial crystals to explain the principle,
working and application of opto-electric modulators.
CO5 utilize appropriate methods to prepare nano-materials and carbon nano-tubes, and to Applying (K3)
comprehend their properties, types and applications.

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 25 35 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
20CYT23 CHEMISTRY OF ELECTRONIC MATERIALS
Programme & B.E – ECE, CSE, EEE, EIE & B.TECH- IT

Branch branches
Prerequisites Applied Chemistry 2 BS 3 0 0 3
Preamble Chemistry of electronic materials aims to equip the engineering students to realize the importance of
chemistry in polymeric materials, metal finishing, organic electronic materials, fuel cells, renewable
energy and e-waste management.
Unit - I Chemistry of Polymeric and Composite Materials : 9
Introduction - structure and property relationship of polymers - plastics - properties and uses of plastics as
engineering materials - rubbers (elastomers) - natural rubber- processing of latex- vulcanization of rubber - synthetic
rubbers- preparation, properties and uses of thiokol and butyl rubber- polymer blends and alloys - fibres-physical
properties-types-spinning processes- composites - classification of composites - fibre reinforced plastics-
processing , properties and uses of fiber reinforced plastics
Unit - II Industrial Metal Finishing : 9
Introduction – technological importance of metal finishing- methods of metal finishing - manufacturing of electronic
component-PCB fabrication- essential of metal finishing: polarization, decomposition potential and overpotential -
surface preparation - Electroplating – Process - effect of plating variables on the nature of electrodeposit -
electroplating of chromium and silver. Electroless plating - electroless copper plating on printed circuit board -
electroless nickel plating process -Distinction between electroplating and electroless plating- advantages of
electroless plating.
Unit - III Chemistry of Organic Electronic Materials and Fuel Cells: 9
Introduction-Organic semiconducting materials – principle and applications - advantages over inorganic
semiconducting materials - P-type and N-type organic semiconducting materials (definition and examples) -
conducting polymers and its applications - organic dielectrics (principle and example) - organic light emitting diodes -
working and applications. Fuel Cells: Importance and classification of fuel cells - description, principle, components,
applications and environmental aspects of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid, molten carbonate and direct
methanol fuel cells.
Unit - IV Renewable Energy Resources: 9
Introduction – global energy consumption scenario- types of energy resources - nuclear energy - nuclear power
reactor - breeder reactors - applications and disadvantages of nuclear energy - design, working, advantages and
disadvantages of solar energy, hydropower, wind energy, geothermal energy, tidal and wave power, ocean thermal
energy - biomass and biofuels - hydrogen as an alternate fuel - hydrogen production - advantages ,disadvantages
and applications - nanotechnology for energy sector.
Unit - V E-Waste and its Management: 9
E- Waste – definition - sources of e-waste– hazardous substances in e-waste - effects of e-waste on environment
and human health- need for e-waste management– e-waste handling rules - waste minimization techniques for
managing e-waste – recycling of e-waste - disposal treatment methods of e- waste – global Scenario of E-waste –
E-waste in India- case studies.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Wiley editorial board. "Wiley Engineering Chemistry". 2 nd Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Reprint 2019,
for Units I,II,IV.
2. Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A., Manjula Rani K.& Kowshalya V.N., “Environmental Science”,
Revised Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2019 for Units I, III, IV, V.
REFERENCES:
1. Palanna O., "Engineering Chemistry" , McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2017 for Units II,III.
Payal
2. B.Joshi & Shashank Deep, “Engineering Chemistry”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2019.

CO1 utilize the polymeric and composite materials for various applications Applying (K3)
CO2 employ the concept of coating techniques in industrial metal finishing Applying (K3)
CO3 apply the concepts of fuel cells, organic electronic materials and its applications Applying (K3)
CO4 explain the role of renewable energy resources to attain sustainability Understanding (K2)
CO5 utilize the knowledge to handle the e-waste and reduce its impacts on environment Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 25 35 40 100
CAT2 25 35 40 100
CAT3 25 35 40 100
ESE 25 35 40 100
20ECT21 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
Programme& BE – Electronics and Communication

Branch Engineering
Preamble To impart the knowledge on the behaviour of electric field and magnetic field in static and time varying
environment.
Unit - I Static electric Fields: 9+3
Introduction to Co-ordinate System – Rectangular – Cylindrical and Spherical Co-ordinate-Coulomb’s Law in Vector
Form – Definition of Electric Field Intensity- Calculation of electric field intensity due to different charge
configurations: Point charge, line charge and surface charge-Electric Flux Density – Gauss Law – Proof of Gauss
Law – Applications. Electric Scalar Potential – Relationship between potential and electric field - Potential due to
infinite uniformly charged line – Potential due to electrical dipole.
Unit - II Conductors and Dielectrics: 9+3
Electric current – Current density – point form of ohm’s law – continuity equation for current. Electric Polarization-
Nature of dielectric materials -Boundary conditions for electric fields- Definition of Capacitance-Several Capacitance
examples. Poisson’s and Laplace’s equation- Capacitance of Parallel Plate using Laplace’s equation.
Unit - III Static Magnetic Field and Magnetic Materials: 9+3
Biot-Savart Law in vector form – Magnetic Field intensity due to a finite and infinite wire carrying a current I –
Magnetic field intensity on the axis of a circular and rectangular loop carrying a current I – Ampere’s circuital law and
simple applications. Magnetic flux density-– Magnetic Vector Potential– Magnetic moment-Nature of magnetic
materials -Magnetic boundary conditions. Definition of Inductance – Inductance of loops and solenoids – Definition
of mutual inductance – simple examples.
Unit - IV Time Varying Fields and Electromagnetic Waves : 9+3
Faraday’s law –Displacement current –Maxwell’s four equations in integral form and differential form- Maxwell’s
equation in Phasor form -Derivation of Wave Equation- Wave equation in Phasor form -Poynting Vector and the flow
of power – Power flow in a co-axial cable.
Unit - V Uniform Plane Waves: 9+3
Plane waves in lossless dielectric– Plane waves in lossy dielectrics – Propagation in good conductors - Reflection of
Plane Wave– normal and oblique incidence-Polarization.
Lecture:45, Tutorial:15, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
1. William H. Hayt, Jr and John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, 7th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company, NewDelhi,2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Matthew N.O. Sadiku,S.V.Kulkarani, “Principles of Electromagnetics”, 6th Edition, Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Edward .C.Jordan. andKeith.G.Balmain “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education , 2015.

CO1 apply the basic laws to determine electric field intensity and potential for point, line and Applying(K3)
surface charge distributions.
CO2 apply boundary conditions and Laplace equations to derive the capacitance of parallel Plate Applying(K3)
capacitors
CO3 calculate Magnetic Field intensity for various current carrying conductors. Applying(K3)
CO4 make use of the basic laws to develop Maxwell's Equation and Wave Equation. Applying(K3)
CO5 compute the characteristics of uniform plane waves in conductor, lossless and lossy Applying(K3)
dielectric media

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT 1-50 marks 20 40 40 - - 100
CAT 2-50 marks 20 40 40 - - 100
CAT 3-50 marks 15 35 50 - - 100
ESE -100 marks 20 30 50 - - 100
20MEC11 ENGINEERING DRAWING

(Common to Civil, Mechanical, Mechatronics, Automobile Engineering, Chemical & Food Technology Branches)
Programme &
BE(Civil, Mech, MTS, Auto) &BTech(Chem, FT) Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble To impart knowledge on orthographic, isometric projections, sectional views and development of
surfaces by solving different application oriented problems.
Unit - I General Principles of Orthographic Projection: 9
Importance of graphics in engineering applications - Use of drafting instruments - BIS conventions and specifications
- Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets - Lettering and dimensioning - Projections of Points, Lines and Planes -
General principles of orthographic projection - First angle projection - Layout of views - Projection of points located in
all quadrant and straight lines located in the first quadrant - Determination of true lengths and true inclinations and
location of traces - Projection of polygonal surface and circular lamina inclined to both reference planes.
Unit - II Projections of Solid: 9
Projections of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference plane
by change of position method.
Unit - III Sectioning of Solids: 9
Sectioning of solids - prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one
reference plane and perpendicular to the other - Obtaining true shape of section.
Unit - IV Development of Surfaces: 9
Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones – development of simple
truncated solids involving prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones.
Unit - V Isometric Projection and Introduction to AutoCAD: 9
Principles of isometric projection - Isometric scale - Isometric projections of simple and truncated solids like prisms,
pyramids, cylinders and cones - Conversion of isometric projection into orthographic projection - Introduction to
AutoCAD.
Lecture:30, Practical:30, Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
1. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, 15 th Edition, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Basant Agrawal, Agrawal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, 2 nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2019.
2. Gopalakrishnana K.R. “Engineering Drawing”, Volume. I & II, Subhas Publications, Bengaluru, 2014.
3. Parthasarathy N.S., Vela Murali. “Engineering Drawing”, 1st Edition, Oxford University Press, 2015.

CO1 interpret international standards of drawings and sketch the projections of points, lines
Understanding (K2)
and planes.
CO2 draw the projections of 3D primitive objects like prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones. Applying (K3)
CO3 construct the various sectional views of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinders and Applying (K3)
cones.
CO4 develop the lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids. Applying (K3)
CO5 sketch the isometric projections of simple and truncated solids and convert isometric Applying (K3)
drawing in to orthographic projection.

CO1 3 2 3 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 3 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 2 3 2 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 25 35 40 100
20MEL11 – ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY

(Common to Civil, Mechanical, Mechatronics, Automobile Engineering, Chemical & Food Technology Branches)
Programme & BE (Civil, Mech, MTS, Auto) & BTech (Chem,
Branch FT)
Preamble This course is designed to provide a hands-on experience in basic of mechanical and electrical
engineering practices.
PART A – MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
1. To prepare square or rectangular shaped MS plates using power tools for cutting, polishing and shaping to the
required dimensions.
2. To carryout drilling, tapping and assembly on the given MS plates.
3. To carryout thread forming on a GI/PVC pipes and prepare water leak proof water line from overhead tank.
4. To prepare a wood or plywood box/tray/any innovative models using modern power tools like cutting machine,
router, jigsaw, power screw driver etc.
5. Welding practice through arc welding / simulator
PART B – ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Safety Aspects of Electrical Engineering, Electrical Symbols, Components Identification, Fuse selection and
installation, Circuit Breakers selection
2. Wiring circuit for fluorescent lamp and Stair case wiring
3. Measurement of Earth resistance
4. Soldering of Simple Circuits and trouble shooting
5. Implementation of half wave and full wave Rectifier using diodes
Total: 30
REFERENCES /MANUAL / SOFTWARE:
1. Engineering Practices Laboratory Manual.

CO1 plan the sequence of operations for effective completion of the planned Creating (K6),
models/ innovative articles Precision (S3)
CO2 identify and use appropriate modern power tools and complete the Applying (K3),
exercises/models accurately Precision (S3)
CO3 select fuses and Circuit breakers Understanding (K2),
Manipulation (S2)
CO4 perform house wiring and realize the importance of earthing Applying (K3),
Manipulation (S2)
CO5 trouble shoot the electrical and electronic circuits Applying (K3),
Manipulation (S2)
CO1 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3
CO2 2 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 1 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 2 2 3
20PHL24 - PHYSICAL SCIENCES LABORATORY II
Programme & BE - Electronics and Communication Sem. Category L T P Credit

Branch Engineering
Pre requisite Nil 2 BS 0 0 2 1
Preamble This course aims to impart hands on training in the determination of physical parameters such as
specific resistance, band gap, hysteresis loss and thickness of a nano-structured material and also the
working UJT, and to develop the skills in handling different basic instruments. This course also aims to
impart the significance of Cl-, Cr6+, DO, Fe2+ and Cu2+ and thereby, to improve the analytical capability. is
course also aims to impart the significance of Cl-, Cr6+, DO, Fe2+ and Cu2+ and thereby, to
improve the analytical capability.
1. Determination of the specific resistance of the material of a wire using Carey-Foster’s bridge.
2. Determination of the band gap of a semiconductor using post office box.
3. Observation of the I-V characteristics of a uni junction transistor.
4. Determination of hysteresis loss in a ferromagnetic material.
5. Determination of the thickness of a nano-structured material using air-wedge arrangement.
6. Estimation of chloride ion in the given water sample using Argentometric method.
7. Estimation of chromium (Cr6+) in wastewater sample.
8. Determination of dissolved oxygen in the given wastewater sample.
9. Estimation of iron using permanganometry.
10. Estimation of copper in the given solution by Iodometric method.
Total: 30
REFERENCES:
1. Tamilarasan K. and Prabu K., “Physics Laboratory Manual”, 1st Edition, SCM Publishers, Erode, 2020.
2. Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A. and Manjula Rani K., “Chemistry Laboratory Manual”, 1 st Edition,
Kalaikathir Publishers, Coimbatore, 2020.

CO1 determine the specific resistance of conducting materials and the band gap of Applying (K3),
semiconducting materials using the concept of electrical conductivity and to obtain the V-I Precision (S3)
characteristics of a UJT using the concept of creation of a region with negative resistance.
CO2 determine the hysteresis loss in ferromagnetic materials using the concept of domain Applying (K3),
theory of ferromagnetism and to determine the thickness of nano-crystalline thin films Precision (S3)
using the concept of interference of light. Estimation of Chloride and Chromium (Cr6+) in
the given water sample and also to determine the dissolved oxygen in the given
wastewater sample.
CO3 estimation of iron and copper in the given solution. Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
20VEC11 – YOGA AND VALUES FOR HOLISTIC DEVELOPMENT
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 1 HS 1 0 1 1
Preamble Providing Value Education to improve the Students’ character - understanding yogic life and physical
health - maintaining youthfulness - Measure and method in five aspects of life
Unit - I Physical Health: 2
Manavalakalai (SKY) Yoga: Introduction - Education as a means for youth empowerment - Greatness of Education
- Yoga for youth Empowerment. Simplified Physical Exercises: Need and Objectives of Simplified Physical
Exercise - Hand, Leg, Breathing, Eye exercises - Kapalabathi, Makarasana Part I, Makarasana Part II, Body
Massage, Acu pressure, Relaxation exercises - Benefits. Yogasanas: Pranamasana - Hastha Uttanasana - Pada
Hasthasana - Aswa Sanjalana Asana - Thuvipatha asva Sanjalana asana - Astanga Namaskara - Bhujangasana -
Atha Muktha Savasana - Aswa Sanjalana Asana - Pada Hasthasana - Hastha Uttanasana - Pranamasana.
Pranayama: Naddi suddi - Clearance Practice - Benefits.
Unit - II Life Force: 2
Reasons for Diseases: Body Function - Reason for Diseases and Prevention - Natural reasons (Genetic / imprints,
Planetary Position, Natural calamities and climatic changes) - Unnatural reasons (Food habits, Thoughts, Deeds).
Philosophy of Kaya kalpa: Enriching Bio-Magnetism - Physical body - Sexual vital fluid - Life force - Bio-
Magnetism - Mind. Maintaining youthfulness: Postponing old age - Transformation of food into seven components
- Importance of sexual vital fluid - Measure and method in five aspects of life - Controlling undue Passion.
Kayakalpa practice: Aswini Mudra - Ojas breath - Benefits of Kaya Kalpa.
Unit - III Mental Health: 2
Mental Frequencies: Beta, Apha, Theta and Delta wave - Agna Meditation explanation - benefits. Shanti
meditation: Shanthi Meditation explanation – benefits. Thuriya Meditation: Thuriya Meditation explanation –
benefits. Benefits of Blessing: Self blessing (Auto suggestion) - Family blessing - Blessing the others - World
blessing - Divine protection.
Unit - IV Values: 2
Human Values: Self control - Self confidence - Honesty Contentment - Humility – Modesty - Tolerance - Adjustment
- Sacrifice – Forgiveness - Purity (Body, Dress, Environment) - Physical purity - Mental purity - Spiritual purity.
Social Values: Non violence – Service. Patriotism – Equality. Respect for parents and elders - care and protection -
Respect for teacher. Punctuality - Time Management.
Unit - V Morality (Virtues): 2
Importance of Introspection: I - Mine (Ego, Possessiveness). Six Evil Temperaments - Greed - Anger -
Miserliness - Immoral sexual passion - Inferiority and superiority Complex – Vengeance. Maneuvering of Six
Temperaments: Contentment - Tolerance - Charity - Chastity - Equality - Pardon (Forgiveness). Five essential
Qualities acquired through Meditation: Perspicacity - Magnanimity - Receptivity - Adaptability - Creativity ( Improved
Memory Power).

TEXT BOOK:
1. Thathuvagnani Vethathiri Maharishi, “Yoga for Youth Empowerment”, Vethathiri Publications, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Thathuvagnani Vethathiri Maharishi, “Yoga for Modern Age”, Vethathiri Publications, 2019.
2. Thathuvagnani Vethathiri Maharishi, “Simplified Physical Exercises”, Vethathiri Publications, 2019.
3. Neelam Sharma, “Holistic Education and Yoga”, Shipra Publications, 2017.
4. Dr. Joseph Murphy, “The Power of Your Subconscious Mind“, Pushpak Publication, 2019.

CO1 understand the importance of physical health and practice simplified physical yoga exercise. Applying (K3)
CO2 understand the importance of Kayakalpa exercise to enrich Bio-Magnetism and practice it. Applying (K3)
CO3 understand the significance of meditation and do meditation to get sound mind. Applying (K3)
CO4 understand the human and social values to provide service to society. Applying (K3)
CO5 understand the evil temperaments and five essential qualities acquired through meditation Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 1
ASSESSMENT PATTERN
Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 NA
CAT2 NA
CAT3 100 100
ESE NA
20MAT33 - LINEAR ALGEBRA AND TRANSFORMS
Programme & B.E. & Electronics and Communication

Branch Engineering
Preamble To provide the skills for handling discrete and continuous time signals by applying Fourier transform and
Z-Transform and impart knowledge in vector and inner product spaces.
Unit - I Vector spaces: 9+3
Definition – Subspaces – Linear combinations and Span – Linear independence – Bases and dimension – Row
space, Column space and Null Space.
Unit - II Inner Product Spaces: 9+3
Inner products – Angle and Orthogonality in inner product spaces – Orthonormal Bases – Gram-Schmidt Process –
QR-Decomposition.
Unit - III Fourier Series: 9+3
Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Change of interval – Odd and even functions – Half range Sine
series – Half range Cosine series – Harmonic analysis.
Unit - IV Fourier Transform: 9+3
Fourier Integral theorem (without proof) – Fourier transform pair – Properties (without proof) – Transforms of simple
functions – Fourier Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties (without proof) – Convolution theorem and Parseval's
identity (Statement and applications only).
Unit - V Z –Transform: 9+3
Definition – Z-transform of some basic functions – Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform: Partial fraction
method – Residue method – Convolution theorem – Applications of Z-transforms: Solution of difference equations.
Lecture: 45, Tutorial: 15, Total: 60
TEXT BOOK:
1. Howard Anton, Chris Rorres, “Elementary Linear Algebra”, 11th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2014 for Units I, II.
2. Ravish R Singh, Mukul Bhatt “Engineering Mathematics”, 1 st Edition, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2016
for Units III, IV, V.
REFERENCES:
1. David C. Lay, Steven R. Lay, Judith McDonald, “Linear Algebra and Its Applications”, 5 th Edition, Pearson
Education Limited, England, 2016.
2. Veerarajan T., "Transforms and Partial Differential Equations", 3 rd Reprint, Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2013.
3. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 10th Edition, John Wiley & Sons Limited, 2019.

CO1 understand the concept of vector spaces Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply the concept of inner product spaces in orthogonalization Applying (K3)
CO3 express given function or data in terms of Fourier series Applying (K3)
CO4 use the mathematical principles of Fourier transforms which will provide the ability to
Understanding (K2)
formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering.
CO5 possess knowledge of Z transform to analyze linear time invariant systems. Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 1

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 50 40 - - - 100
CAT2 10 20 70 - - - 100
CAT3 10 40 50 - - - 100
ESE 10 40 50 - - - 100
20CSC31 - PROGRAMMING IN C
(Common to all BE/BTech Engineering & Technology branches except CSE, IT )
Programme & All BE/BTech Engineering & Technology branches

Branch except CSE, IT
Preamble The course is designed for use by freshmen students taking their first course in programming. It deals with the
techniques needed to practice computational thinking, the art of using computers to solve problems and the ways
the computers can be used to solve problems. This course also focuses on developing programming skills using C
language.
Unit - I Introduction to Computer and Problem Solving: 9
Overview of computers : Types, Generations, Characteristics, Basic computer Organization – Problem solving techniques:
Algorithms - Flowcharts – Pseudo codes – Structuring the logic: Sequential, selection and repetitive structure
Unit - II Introduction to C and Control Statements: 9
The structure of a C program – Compiling and executing C program – C Tokens – Character set in C – Keywords – identifiers-
Basic data Types – Variables – constants – Input/Output statements – operators - decision making and looping statements
Unit - III Arrays and Functions: 9
Declaring, initializing and accessing arrays – operations on arrays – Two dimensional arrays and their operations. Functions :
Introduction- Using functions, function declaration and definition – function call – return statement – passing parameters to
functions: basic data types and arrays – storage classes – recursive functions
Unit - IV Strings and Pointers: 9
Strings :Introduction – operations on strings : finding length, concatenation, comparing and copying – string and character
manipulation functions, Arrays of strings. Pointers : declaring pointer variables – pointer expression and arithmetic, passing
arguments to function using pointers -pointers and 1D arrays –arrays vs pointers , pointers and strings,
Unit - V User-defined Data Types and File Handling: 9
User-defined data types: Structure: Introduction – nested structures– arrays of structure – structure and functions -unions –
enumerated data type. File Handling : Introduction - opening and closing files – reading and writing data to files -Manipulating
file position indicator : fseek(), ftell() and rewind()
List of Exercises:
1. Writing algorithms and drawing flowcharts using Raptor Tool for problems involving sequential, Selection and repetition
structures
2. Programs for demonstrating the use of different types of operators like arithmetic, logical, relational and ternary operators
3. Programs using decision making and repetitive statements
4. Programs for demonstrating one-dimensional and two-dimensional numeric array
5. Programs to demonstrate modular programming concepts using functions and strings (Using built-in and user-defined
functions)
6. Programs to illustrate the use of structures and pointers
7. Programs to implement file operations
Lecture:45, Practical : 30, Total:75

TEXT BOOK:
1. Reema Thareja, “Programming in C ”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Yashavant Kanetkar, "Let us C", 16th Edition, BPB Publications, 2018.
2. Sumitabha Das, “Computer Fundamentals and C Programming”, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill, 2018.
3. Balagurusamy E., "Programming in ANSI C", 7th Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.

CO1: outline the basics of computers and apply problem solving techniques to express the solution Applying (K3)
for the given problem
CO2: identify the appropriate looping and control statements in C and develop applications using Applying (K3)
these statements
CO3: develop simple C programs using the concepts of arrays and modular programming Applying (K3)
CO4: apply the concepts of pointers and develop C programs using strings and pointers Applying (K3)
CO5: make use of user defined data types and file concept to solve given problems Applying (K3)
CO6: demonstrate the execution of flowcharts for the given problem using Raptor Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO7: demonstrate the application of sequential, selective and repetitive control structures Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8: develop solutions to the given problem using derived /user defined data types and functions Applying (K3),
and also using file concepts Precision (S3)

COs
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
/POs
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 1
CO6 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO7 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO8 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

Test /
Remembering Understanding Analyzing Evaluating Creating
Bloom’s Applying (K3) % Total %
(K1) % (K2) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
Category*
CAT1 20 30 50 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 20 30 50 100
20ECT31 - DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Programme & B.E & Electronics and Communication

Branch Engineering
Preamble To gain knowledge about the digital logic number systems, code conversion, Boolean algebra, Boolean
function minimization using different minimization techniques, and also to design different combinational
and sequential logic circuits.
Unit - I Binary Numbers and Minimization Techniques: 9
Complements-Signed binary numbers- Binary arithmetic-Binary codes: Weighted and non-weighted codes: BCD,
2421, Gray code, ASCII. Boolean postulates and laws - De-Morgan‘s theorem - Principle of Duality- Boolean
expression- Minimization of Boolean expressions-Minterm, Maxterm, Sum of Products (SOP), Product of
Sums(POS)
Unit - II Gate Level Minimization and Hardware Description Language: 9
Karnaugh map minimization -Implementations of logic functions using universal gates -Comparison of TTL and
CMOS characteristics. Verilog: Verilog Basics - Overview of Verliog HDL-Modules and ports-Gate level modeling-
Design procedure – Half adder and subtractor – Full adder and subtractor
Unit - III Combinational Circuits and Hardware Description Language : 9
Parallel binary adder and subtractor – Carry look ahead adder -BCD adder- Multiplexer- Demultiplexer – Decoder -
Encoder – Parity checker and generator – Code converters- Magnitude comparator-design of combinational circuits
using Verilog HDL.
Unit - IV Sequential Circuits: 9
Introduction, Flipflops: SR, JK, D and T –Level and Edge triggering - Realization of one flipflop using other flipflops-
Design and analysis of synchronous sequential circuits: Characteristic, excitation tables and equations, State
diagram, State table, State minimization and State assignment -Design of synchronous counters- Ripple counter –
Registers: Shift registers, Universal shift register.
Unit - V Asynchronous Sequential Circuits: 9
Analysis of asynchronous sequential circuits – Primitive state table – Minimization of primitive state table –State
assignment – Excitation table - Cycles – Races –Hazards: Static Dynamic, Essential, Hazards elimination –
Realization of combinational logic circuits using PLDs: PROM, PLA and PAL.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Morris Mano M., "Digital Design", 6th Edition, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Charles H. Roth, "Fundamentals of Logic Design", 6th Edition, Thomson Learning, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Palnitkar Samir, "Verilog HDL: Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2017.
3. Salivahanan S. &Arivazhagan S., "Digital Circuits and Design", 5th Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi,
2018.

CO1 apply boolean laws for logic minimization Applying (K3)
CO2 apply Karnaugh map techniques for gate level logic minimization Applying (K3)
CO3 design combinational circuits Applying (K3)
CO4 design synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuits Applying (K3)
CO5 realize boolean functions using PLDs Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 5 45 50 100
CAT2 5 45 50 100
CAT3 5 40 55 100
ESE 5 40 55 100
20ECT32 - SOLID STATE DEVICES AND CIRCUITS

Branch Engineering
Prerequisites Solid State Physics 3 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble To understand about the construction of power supply circuits, biasing of BJT, mid band analysis of BJT,
low and high analysis of BJT amplifiers
Unit - I P-N Junction Diode and Special Diodes: 9
Construction of PN junction diodes–VI characteristics–Quantitative theoryof PN diode – Transition and diffusion
capacitances – Applications: Clipping and clamping circuits - Voltage multipliers - Zener diode – Characteristics of
Zener diode- LED-Photo diode - Solar cell
Unit - II BJT and its biasing: 9
Construction and Principle of Operation - I/O characteristics:CE, CB and CC configurations-Need for biasing- Load
line and Quiescent point- Variation of Quiescent point -Stability factors- Different types of biasing circuits- Method of
stabilizing the Q point (Derivation for S only) - Bias compensation techniques.
Unit - III Midband Analysis of BJT: 9
CE, CB and CC amplifiers-Midband analysis of CE,CB,CC (BJT) single stage amplifiers using small signal
equivalent circuit - Miller’s theorem- Analysis using Miller’s Theorem - Methods of increasing input impedance using
Darlington connection and Bootstrapping(Concept alone) - Multistage Amplifiers (CE-CB).
Unit - IV Frequency Response of Amplifiers: 9
Low Frequency Analysis of BJT -Hybrid – π Equivalent Circuit of BJTs: Elements in the Hybrid π Model- CE Short
Circuit Current Gain- Frequency response of multistage amplifiers: Calculation of overall upper and lower cutoff
frequencies.
Unit - V Thyristors and Power Supply Circuits: 9
SCR, TRIAC- Construction, working and characteristics- Half wave and Full wave Bridge rectifiers with resistive
load- Analysis for Vdc and ripple voltage with C and L filters. Zener diode regulator -Transistor voltage regulators:
Series and shunt- Line regulation and load regulation- Switched Mode Power Supply – General Block diagram.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith and Arun N. Chandorkar, "Microelectronic Circuits", 7 th Edition, Oxford
REFERENCES:
1. Salivahanan S. and Sureshkumar N., “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2017.
2. Jocob Millman, Christos C. Halkias, SatyabrataJit, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill,
New Delhi, 2015.
3. Bell, David A., “Solid State Pulse Circuits”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1992, ISBN:
97801382977893.

CO1 comprehend the construction and characteristics of various electronic devices Understanding(K2)
CO2 design various biasing circuits of BJT Applying (K3)
CO3 analyze transistor amplifier circuits using small signal h-parameter model Analyzing (K4)
CO4 analyze the frequency response of amplifiers using hybrid π model Analyzing (K4)
CO5 design various power supply circuits Applying (K3)

CO1 2 1 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 10 20 30 40 100
CAT3 10 30 30 30 100
ESE 10 30 30 30 100
20ECT33 - SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

Branch Engineering
Preamble This course provides the foundations for understanding the various types of signals and systems.
Unit - I Signals (CT and DT): 9+3
Standard CT and DT Signals – Classification of CTS and DTS –Mathematical operations on CTS and DTS.
Systems: CT and DT systems- Classification of continuous time and discrete time systems
Unit - II Time Domain Analysis of CT and DT: 9+3
Sampling of continuous time signals- Convolution integral and convolution sum -properties of convolution- Impulse
response of a system- step response of a system- Graphical procedure for convolution - Interconnection of systems.
Unit - III Real Frequency Domain Analysis: 9+3
Complex exponential Fourier series analysis – Gibbs phenomenon-Fourier Transform: CTFT- Properties - Response
of LTI CT systems, DTFT – Properties - Response of LTI DT systems. Inverse Fourier Transform for CT and DT
Signals.
Unit - IV Laplace Transform (LT): 9+3
Relation between CTFT and LT- Region of Convergence- LT of CT signals- Properties - Response of LTI-CT
systems- Impulse response- Step response- Inverse Laplace Transform.
Unit - V Z-transform (ZT): 9+3
Relation between DTFT and ZT - Region of Convergence- ZT of DT signals- Properties - Response of LTI-DT
systems- Impulse response- Step response- Inverse Z-transform using partial fraction and residue method -
Realization of DT systems using direct form I and II.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Oppenheim Alanv, Willsky Alan S., Hamid Nawab S., “Signals & Systems”, 2 nd Edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Nagoor Kani A., “Signals and Systems”, 23rd Reprint, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2019.
2. Roberts M.J., “Signals And Systems Analysis Using Transform Method and Matlab”, 3 rd Edition, Tata McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 2018.

CO1 Illustrate the continuous time and discrete time signals and systems Applying (K3)
CO2 solve the system response for I and II order systems Applying (K3)
CO3 apply Fourier transform techniques and plot the spectrum Applying (K3)
CO4 utilize Laplace transform and solve continuous time system response Applying (K3)
CO5 apply Z-transform on discrete time systems and solve the system response Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 10 30 60 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 10 30 60 100
20ECL31 - DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

Branch Engineering
Preamble To design combinational and sequential logic circuits.

1. Verification of Boolean theorems and digital logic gates
2. Design and implementation of combinational circuits using logic gates
3. Design and implementation of adder and subtractor
4. Design and implementation of encoders and decoders.
5. Design and simulation of adder, subtractor, encoders and decoders
6. Design and simulation of multiplexers, demultiplexers and code converters
7. Design and simulation of magnitude comparator
8. Design and implementation of flip flops using basic gates.
9. Design and implementation of shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO modes using suitable ICs.
10. Design and implementation of synchronous counters and asynchronous counters.
11. Mini project using Combinational circuits and sequential circuits
Total:30
REFERENCES/MANUAL/SOFTWARE:
2. Modelsim

CO1 design and verify combinational circuits using logic gates Applying(K3),
Precision (S3)
CO2 design and simulate combinational circuits using Verilog HDL Applying(K3),
Precision (S3)
CO3 design and test sequential circuits using flipflops Applying(K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 2
20ECL32 - SOLID STATE DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY

Branch Engineering
Prerequisites NIL 3 PC 0 0 2 1
Preamble To verify the characteristics of devices and design amplifiers & power supply circuits
List of Experiments :
1. Characteristics of PN Junction diode and Zener diode
2. Characteristics of FET
3. Characteristics of UJT
4. Characteristics of SCR and TRIAC
5. Characteristics of BJT(Common Emitter Configuration) and Determination of h-Parameters
6. Frequency response of BJT amplifiers with fixed bias / voltage divider bias / collector to base bias
7. Frequency response of Darlington Pair
8. Frequency response of multistage amplifiers
9. Construction and working of bridge rectifier using diode with and without capacitor filter
10. Simulation of
a) Characteristics of BJT
b) Frequency response of Voltage Divider Bias (BJT)
11. Frequency response of common-collector amplifier using PSpice
12. Frequency Response of Cascode Amplifier using PSpice
Total:30
2. Orcad Cadence PSpice Software 16.6
z
CO1 demonstrate the characteristics of various electronic devices Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO2 design various biasing circuits for electronic systems Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO3 perform simulation of the frequency response of amplifiers using electronic Applying (K3),
systems design tools Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 1 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 2 2
20EGL31 - ENGLISH FOR WORKPLACE COMMUNICATION LABORATORY
(Common to all BE/BTech Engineering and Technology branches)
Programme All BE/BTech Engineering & Technology branches

& Branch
Prerequisite Nil 3/4 HS 0 0 2 1
This course is designed to impart required levels of fluency in using the English Language at B1/B2 level in the
Preamble:
CEFR through activities, hands-on training and application.
Unit -I Listening: 6
Techniques for effective listening and note taking; listening to audio scripts, podcasts and TED talks; listening to discourse samples
of native speakers and imitating; improving pronunciation; introduction to the basics of phonetics and understanding different
accents.
Unit -II Reading: 6
Speed reading skills; reading to gain knowledge; reading newspaper articles to improve writing; academic journals to enrich
vocabulary and word power; reading aloud with proper stress and intonation; reading to draw inferences.
Unit -III Soft Skills: 6
Importance of soft skills at workplace - understanding soft skills through case studies - developing positive attitude; goal setting; time
management; team work; telephone etiquette; developing professionalism, interpersonal skills and work ethics.
Unit -IV Writing: 6
Introduction to pre-writing, style and mechanics of writing; mind mapping; creating content from an outline; paragraph and resume
writing; nuances of academic writing; writing Statement of Purpose (SOP), editing, revising and proof reading for clarity and
readability; structural and grammatical accuracy.
Unit -V Speaking: 6
Verbal and non-verbal communication; fluency and spoken English; introducing oneself and others; making presentations on topics
using prepared material; mock interviews; dynamics of Group Discussion.
List of Exercises / Experiments :
1. Mock Interview
2. Presentation
3. Reading Aloud
4. Group Discussion
5. Soft Skills through Case Studies
6. Listening Test
Total: 30
1. Jeff Butterfield, “Soft Skills for Everyone”, 1st Edition, Cengage Learning, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Bob Dignen, Steve Flinders and Simon Sweeney, “Professional English for Work and Life, English 365, Student’s Book 2”, 1st
Edition, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2004.
CO1: acquire effective listening and reading skills Understanding (K2),
Imitation (S1)
CO2: acquire and demonstrate appropriate professional skills for the workplace Applying (K3),
Naturalization (S5)
CO3: speak fluently and write meaningfully in English in the given context Applying (K3),
Articulation (S4)

CO1 2 3 2
CO2 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 3
20GET31 - UNIVERSAL HUMAN VALUES

(Common to All BE/BTech branches)
Programme & All BE/BTech Engineeirng & Technology

Branch branches
Prerequisites NIL 3/4 HS 2 0 0 2
Preamble To make the student to know what they ‘really want to be’ in their life and profession, understand the
meaning of happiness and prosperity for a human being. Also to facilitate the students to understanding
of harmony at all the levels of human living, and live accordingly
Unit - I Introduction: 6
Need and Basic Guidelines of Value Education – Content and Process of Value Education – Self Exploration –
purpose of self-Exploration – Content and Process of Self exploration – Natural Acceptance – Realization and
Understanding – Basic Human Aspirations – Continuous Happiness and Prosperity – Exploring Happiness and
Prosperity – Basic Requirement for Fulfillment of Human Aspirations – Relationships – Physical Facilities – Right
Understanding.
Unit - II Harmony in the Self and Body: 6
Human Being and Body – Understanding Myself as Co–existence of Self (‘I’) and Body, Needs of the Self and Body,
Activities in the Self and Body, Self (‘I’) as the Conscious Entity, the Body as the Material Entity – Exercise – Body
as an Instrument– Harmony in the Self (‘I) – Understanding Myself – Harmony with Body.
Unit - III Harmony in the Family and Society: 6
Harmony in the Family – Justice – Feelings (Values) in Human Relationships – Relationship from Family to Society
– Identification of Human Goal – Five dimensions of Human Endeavour.
Unit - IV Harmony in Nature and Existence: 6
Order of Nature – Interconnectedness – Understanding the Four order – Innateness – Natural Characteristic – Basic
Activity – Conformance – Introduction to Space – Co–existence of units of Space – Limited and unlimited – Active
and No–activity – Existence is Co–existence.
Unit - V Implications of the above Holistic Understanding of Harmony on Professional Ethics: 6
Values in different dimensions of Human Living – Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct –Implications of Value
based Living – Identification of Comprehensive Human Goal – Humanistic Education – Universal Human Order –
Competence and Issues in Professional Ethics.
Total: 30
TEXT BOOK:
1. Gaur R.R., Sangal R., Bagaria G.P., “A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional Ethics”, 1st
Edition, Excell Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Ivan Illich, “Energy & Equity”, The Trinity Press, USA, 1974.
2. Schumacher E.F., “Small is Beautiful: a study of economics as if people mattered”, Britain, 1973.

CO1 restate the meaning of happiness and prosperity and do a correct appraisal of the Applying (K3)
current scenario in the society
CO2 distinguish between the Self and the Body, understand the meaning of Harmony in the Applying (K3)
Self, the Co–existence of Self and Body
CO3 infer the value of harmonious relationship based on trust, respect and other naturally Applying (K3)
acceptable feelings in human–human relationships and explore their role in ensuring a
harmonious society
CO4 transform themselves to co-exist with nature by realising interconnectedness and four Applying (K3)
order of nature
CO5 distinguish between ethical and unethical practices, and extend ethical and moral Applying (K3)
practices for a better living

CO1 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 25 75 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 NA
ESE NA
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1, 2 – 100 marks)
20MAT43 - PROBABILITY THEORY AND STOCHASTIC PROCESS

Branch Engineering
Preamble To impart knowledge in random variables, probability distributions, correlation, linear systems and apply
the concepts of random process and spectral densities in communication engineering.
Unit - I Random Variables and Probability distributions: 9+3
Introduction to Probability - Random Variables - Discrete and Continuous random variables – Moments – Moment
generating functions. Standard Probability Distributions: Discrete Distributions: Binomial distribution – Poisson
distribution – Continuous Distributions: Exponential distribution – Normal distribution.
Unit - II Two Dimensional Random Variables: 9+3
Two Dimensional Random Variables: Joint probability distributions – Marginal and conditional distributions –
Covariance – Correlation and regression – Function of random variables – Transformation of random variables.
Unit - III Random processes: 9+3
General concepts and definitions – Classification – Stationary process – Markov chains – Transition probabilities –
Limiting distributions – Poisson process.
Unit - IV Correlation and Spectral densities: 9+3
Auto Correlation – Cross Correlation – Properties (Without Proof) – Power spectral density – Cross spectral density
– Properties (Without Proof) – Wiener- Khintchine relation – Relationship between cross power spectrum and cross
correlation function.
Unit - V Linear Systems with Random Inputs: 9+3
Linear system Fundamentals - Random Signal Response of Linear Systems –Spectral Characteristic of System
Response – Power density spectrum of response – System Evaluation using Random noise - Noise Bandwidth –
Band pass – Band limited – Narrow Band Processes.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Veerarajan, T, “Probability, Statistics, Random Processes and Queuing Theory”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,
New Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Peebles P.Z., “Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal Principle”, 4 th Edition, McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, India, 2017.
2. Ibe, O.C., “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes”, 2 nd Edition, Academic Press, Elsevier,
USA, 2014.
3. Roy.D.Yates and David.J.Goodman, “Probability and Stochastic Processes - A friendly introduction for Electrical
and Computer Engineers”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, USA, 2014.
4. Stark H. and Woods J.W., “Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal Processing”, 3 rd
Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002.

CO1 understand the fundamental concepts of random variables and apply suitable probability
Applying (K3)
distributions in engineering problems.
CO2 understand the concepts of two dimensional random variables and regression. Applying (K3)
CO3 interpret the temporal characteristics of random process. Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the concepts of spectral densities and correlation functions to solve complex
Applying (K3)
engineering problems.
CO5 apply the random process concepts to linear time invariant systems. Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 10 25 65 100
CAT2 10 20 70 100
CAT3 10 20 70 100
ESE 10 20 70 100
20CSC41 – PYTHON PROGRAMMING
(Common to all BE/BTech Engineering & Technology branches except CSE, IT )
Programme & All BE/BTech Engineering & Technology

Branch branches except CSE, IT
Preamble This course introduces the core python programming. It emphasizes on developing python programs
with all data types, functions, classes, objects and numpy
Introduction: Problem solving strategies – program design tools – Types of errors – Testing and Debugging- Basics:
Literals – variables and identifiers – data types - input operation – comments – reserved words – indentation –
Operators and Expressions – Decision Control Statements:Introduction – conditional statement – iterative
statements – Nested Loops – break,continue and pass statements – else in loops.
Unit - II Lists,Tuples and Dictionary: 9
Lists,Tuples and Dictionary:Lists:Access, update, nested, cloning, operations, methods , comprehensions, looping -
Tuple:Create, utility, access, update, delete, operations, assignments, returning multiple values, nested tuples, index
and count method - Dictionary: Create, access, add and modify, delete, sort, looping, nested, built-in methods – list
vs tuple vs dictionary.
Unit - III Strings and Regular Expressions: 9
Strings and Regular Expressions:Strings:Concatenation , append, multiply on strings – Immutable – formatting
operator – Built-in string methods and functions – slice operation – functions – operators – comparing – iterating –
string module – Regular Expressions – match, search, sub, findall and finditer functions – flag options.
Unit - IV Functions and Modules: 9
Functions and Modules: Functions:Introduction - definition – call – variable scope and lifetime – return statement –
function arguments – lambda function – documentation strings – programming practices recursive function-
Modules:Modules – packages – standard library methods – function redefinition.
Unit - V Object Orientation, NumPy and Matplotlib: 9
Object Orientation: Class and Objects:Class and objects – class methods and self – constructor – class and object
variables – destructor – public and private data member.NumPy :NumPy Arrays – Computation on NumPy Arrays.
Matplotlib : Line plots – Scatter Plots

1. Programs using conditional and looping statements
2. Implementation of list and tuple operations
3. Implementation of dictionary operations
4. Perform various string operations
5. Use regular expressions for validating inputs
6. Demonstration of different types of functions and parameter passing
7. Develop programs using classes and objects
8. Perform computation on Numpy arrays
9. Draw different types of plots using Matplotlib
TEXT BOOK:
1. Reema Thareja, "Python Programming using Problem Solving Approach", 3 rd Edition, Oxford University Press,
2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Nageswara Rao, "Core Python Programming", 2nd Edition, DreamTech Press, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Jake Vander Plas , "Python Data Science Handbook Essential Tools for Working with Data", 1st Edition, O'Reilly
Media, , 2016.

CO1 understand the basics of python programming using nested and control statements Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply list, tuple and dictionary to handle variety of data Applying(K3)
CO3 apply strings and regular expression for searching in a string. Applying(K3)
CO4 solve the problems using functions and modules Applying(K3)
CO5 understand the object oriented concepts and perform data science operations for Applying(K3)
applications
CO6 Applying (K3),
implement the basic data types and control statements
Precision(S3)
CO7 Applying (K3),
demonstrate functions, regular expressions and object oriented concepts
Precision(S3)
CO8 Applying (K3),
perform numpy operations and analyse results using matplotlib
Precision(S3)

COs/Pos PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO6 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO7 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO8 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 25 25 50 100
CAT2 20 20 60 100
CAT3 20 20 60 100
ESE 25 25 50 100
20ECT41 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
Programme&
B.E & ECE Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Solid State Devices and Circuits 4 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble To understand and analyze feedback amplifiers, large signal amplifiers, FET amplifiers, oscillators and
wave shaping circuits.
Unit - I FET Amplifiers: 9
Biasing of FET :Fixed bias, Self-Bias, Voltage Divider Bias-Small Signal Low Frequency Analysis: Common Source
and Common Drain Amplifiers-High Frequency Large Signal Amplifiers Analysis: Common Source and Common
Drain Amplifiers
Unit - II Feedback Amplifiers: 9
Feedback amplifiers - Block diagram - Loop gain - Gain and Cut off frequencies with Feedback – Effect of negative
feedback - Four types of feedback topologies - Input and output resistances with feedback - Method of identifying
feedback topology-Analysis of feedback amplifiers – Feedback Amplifiers using FET (Identification of topology only)
Unit - III Oscillators: 9
Condition for oscillation – RC Oscillators: RC phase shift (using BJT and FET) and Wien Bridge Oscillators - LC
oscillators: Hartley and Colpitts oscillator using BJT, Quartz crystal: Construction - Electrical equivalent circuit of
crystal - Crystal oscillator circuit: Miller and Pierce oscillators.
Unit - IV Large Signal Amplifiers: 9
Classification of amplifiers (Class A, B, AB, and C&D)-Direct coupled and transformer-coupled class A power
amplifiers and its efficiency-Distortion in power Amplifiers-Class B complementary-symmetry, push-pull power
amplifiers. Calculation of power output, efficiency and power dissipation-Crossover distortion and its elimination
methods- Class C amplifiers-operation-applications.
Unit - V Multivibrators& Time Base Generators 9
RL Integrator & RC Differentiator circuits - Multivibrators:Collector coupled Astablemultivibrator- Collector coupled
Monostablemultivibrator- Bistablemultivibrators- Schmit trigger-Introduction to Voltage time base generator-Errors of
generation of sweep waveform- UJT relaxation oscillator .
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. JocobMillman, Christos C. Halkias, SatyabrataJit, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill,
New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Millman J. and Taub H., "Pulse Digital and Switching Waveform", 2 nd Edition, McGraw Hill, New York, 2007.
2. Bell and David A., ―Solid State Pulse Circuits‖, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1992.
3. Allen Mottershead, ―Electronic Devices and Circuits - An Introduction‖, 1st Edition, Prentice Hallof India, New
Delhi, 1990.

CO1 analyse the FET biasing circuits, low and high frequency FET amplifiers Analysing (K4)
CO2 examine the performance of amplifiers using feedback concepts Analysing (K4)
CO3 design oscillators for various frequencies for practical applications Applying (K3)
CO4 analyse the performance of large signal amplifiers Applying (K3)
CO5 design non-sinusoidal oscillators Applying (K3)

CO1 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 30 20 40 - - 100
CAT2 10 40 25 25 - - 100
CAT3 10 30 30 30 - - 100
ESE 10 30 30 30 - - 100
20ECT42 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER
Programme &
BE &ECE Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Digital Electronics 4 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble To understand the concepts of microprocessor and microcontrollers techniques and do programming for
real time applications.
Unit - I 8086 Microprocessor: 9
Register organization of 8086 – Architecture –Memory Segmentation- Physical memory organization - I/O
addressing capability - Addressing modes of 8086 - Instruction set of 8086: Data transfer instructions - String
instructions- Logical instructions - Arithmetic instructions - Transfer and control instructions - Processor control
instructions.
Unit - II 8086 Microprocessor ALP Programming: 9
Simple Assembly Language Programming - Introduction to stack - Interrupt and interrupt service routines-Time
delays using counter.
Unit - III 89C51 Microcontroller: 9
Introduction to RISC and CISC machines – 89C51 Microcontroller hardware block diagram - Data and program
memory mapping - Register organization - I/O pins - Ports and circuits - Interfacing to external memory- Instruction
sets - Addressing modes.
Unit - IV 89C51 Programming: 9
Assembly language programming -Timer and counter programming – Serial Data Communication using MAX232
converter – Interrupt programming.
Unit - V 89C51 Case study: 9
Traffic light Control: LED, 7 segment display-Digital locker: LCD, Matrix Keypad-Fire alarm System:ADC,LM35
sensor-Speed control of Conveyor Belt: DC motor, Stepper motor –Smart shoe for Physically Challenged.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Ray K., and Bhurchandi K. M., ―Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals: Architecture,
I,II
Programming and Interface‖, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012, ISBN: 9780070140622
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi , RolinMcKinlay. The 8051 Microcontroller and
III, IV,V
Embedded Systems using Assembly and C, 2nd, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin McKinlay ,Lyla B. Das Microprocessors and
Microcontrollers, 1st, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Patel, ―The 8051 Microcontroller Based Embedded Systems‖, 1st Edition, McGraw Hill Education, New Delhi,
2014, ISBN : 9789332901254.

CO1 describe the internal blocks and register organisation of 8086 microprocessor architecture Understanding
(K2)
CO2 use assembly language programming skill for arithmetic and logic operations using 8086 Applying (K3)
processor
CO3 describe the internal blocks of 89C51 microcontroller Architecture and interfacing external Understanding
memory (K2)
CO4 develop assembly language programming for internal modules of 89C51 controller Applying (K3)
CO5 apply programming skills to interface external peripherals Applying (K3)

CO1 2 1 3 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 3
CO3 2 1 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 65 15 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 10 35 55 100
ESE 20 30 50 100
20ECT43 - CONTROL ENGINEERING
Programme& B.E. & Electronics and Communication
Branch Engineering
Prerequisites Matrices and differential equations 4 ES 3 1 0 4
Preamble To understand the concepts of mathematical modeling of various systems and also to examine the
system response and stability of the developed models in both time and frequency domain.
Unit - I System Representation: 9+3
Basic elements in control systems – Open and closed loop systems – Modeling of Mechanical systems-Translational
and Rotational Systems-Modeling of Electrical Networks- Electrical analogy of mechanical systems – Transfer
function - DC Motors-Electromechanical system - Gear trains-Block Diagram Reduction-Signal Flow Graph.
Unit - II Time Domain Analysis: 9+3
Standard test signals- Time response of First and Second order system - Time domain specifications – Error
coefficients – Steady state error- Generalized error series –Introduction to P, PI, PID controllers - Effect of P, PI, PID
controllers on time response.
Unit - III Stability Analysis in time Domain: 9+3
Characteristics Equation – Location of Roots in S plane for stability – Routh Hurwitz Criterion – Root Locus
construction – Effect of poles and zeros on system stability.
Unit - IV Frequency Response Analysis: 9+3
Frequency response – Correlation between frequency domain and time domain specifications -Bode plot – Polar
plot –Stability Analysis in Frequency Domain-Nyquist Stability Criteria-Introduction to Compensators.
Unit - V State Space Representation: 9+3
Introduction to state space analysis - Phase variable and canonical forms - State transition matrix - Solutions to state
space equation - Controllability and Observability of systems-Kalman test for Controllability and Observability.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Nagrath I.J. & Gopal M., "Control Systems Engineering", 5th Edition, New Age International, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Norman S. Nise, "Control Systems Engineering", 5th Edition, Wiley-India Publishers, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Gopal M., "Control Systems; Principles and Design", 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2012.

CO1 develop Mathematical models for various types of control systems. Applying (K3)
CO2 derive the time response of first and second order controllers Applying (K3)
CO3 examine the stability of the systems in time domain. Analyzing (K4)
CO4 make use of plots to interpret the stability of systems in frequency domain. Analyzing (K4)
CO5 apply various tests to find the controllability and observability for various systems. Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 35 45 100
CAT2 10 30 40 20 100
CAT3 5 25 50 20 100
ESE 10 20 60 10 100
20ECL41 –ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LABORATORY
Programme&
Branch
Preamble To design amplifiers, oscillators and multivibrators.

1. Frequency response of common source amplifier using self bias
2. Frequency response of current series feedback amplifier using BJT
3. Frequency response of Voltage series feedback amplifier using FET
4. Design of audio frequency oscillator: RC Phase Shift Oscillator using BJT
5. Design of radio frequency oscillator: Hartley oscillator / Miller Oscillator using BJT
6. Response of Class -B Complementary symmetry Power amplifier-with and without crossover distortion
7. Design of Class C tuned Amplifier using BJT
8. Design of Bistable multivibrator using BJT
9. Design of Astable multivibrator using BJT
10. Design of UJT relaxation oscillator
11. Simulation using PSpice : Frequency response of current shunt / voltage shunt feedback amplifier using
BJT/FET
12. Simulation using PSpice : Wien Bridge Oscillator/ Colpitts Oscillator using BJT/FET
Total:30
2. Orcad Cadence PSpice Software 16.6

CO1 Construct feedback and large signal amplifiers using BJT and FET for the given Applying (K3),
specifications Precision (S3)
CO2 demonstrate the working of, oscillators (RC,LC) and multivibrators Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO3 Design the amplifiers and oscillators using electronic systems design tools. Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 3 3 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1
20ECL42 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LABORATORY
Programme &
BE & ECE Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble To do programming using 8086 and 89C51

1. Arithmetic operations using 8086
2. Sorting, searching and string manipulation using 8086
3. Matrix multiplication using 8086 microprocessor
4. BCD code conversion using 8086 microprocessor
5. Arithmetic operations using 89C51 microcontroller.
6. Interfacing of switch and LED with 89C51 microcontroller.
7. Interfacing of ADC with 89C51 microcontroller.
8. Interfacing of DAC with 89C51 microcontroller.
9. Stepper Motor interfacing with 89C51 microcontroller.
10. DC Motor interfacing with 89C51 microcontroller
11. UART communication in 89C51 microcontroller using Keil and Proteus
12. LCD interfacing with 89C51 microcontroller using Keil and Proteus
Total:30
2. Keil and Proteus software

CO1 apply 8086 and 8051 instruction sets and addressing modes for a given addition / Applying (K3),
Subtraction / Multiplication / Division / sorting and code conversions programs Precision (S3)
CO2 build LED , Switch , ADC, DAC, Stepper motor and DC Motor interfaces with 8051 Applying (K3),
Microcontroller Precision (S3)
CO3 demonstrate the working of serial communication and LCD Interfaces using 8051 Applying (K3),
Microcontroller Precision (S3)

CO1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 1 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1
20MNT31 - ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Programme & All BE/BTech Engineering & Technology

Branch branches
Prerequisites Nil 3/4 MC 2 0 0 0
Preamble This course provides an approach to understand the various natural resources, ecosystem, bio-diversity,
pollution control & monitoring methods for sustainable life and also to provide knowledge and to create
awareness for engineering students on biological sciences.
Unit - I Environmental Studies and Natural Resources: 5
Introduction to Environmental Science – uses, over-exploitation and conservation of forest, water, mineral, food,
energy and land resources–case studies
Unit - II Ecosystem and Biodiversity: 5
Ecosystems: concept and components of an ecosystem -structural and functional features – Functional attributes
(Food chain and Food web only). Biodiversity: Introduction – Classification – Bio geographical classification of
India- Value of biodiversity – Threats and Conservation of biodiversity - case studies.
Unit - III Environmental Pollution: 5
Environmental Pollution: Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution - Climate change,
global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion (b)Water pollution (c) Soil pollution - Role of an individual in
prevention of pollution - case studies.
Unit - IV Environmental Monitoring: 5
Sustainability -three pillars of sustainability- factors affecting environmental sustainability-approaches for sustainable
development - Introduction to EIA - objectives of EIA - environment protection act – air (prevention and control of
pollution) act – water (prevention and control of pollution) act.
Unit - V Introduction to Biological Science: 5
Functions of Carbohydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids - Cells and its organelles - plasma membrane,
mitochondria and nucleus- Heredity and DNA - organization of DNA in cells - Genes and chromosomes- Cell division
-Types of cell division- mitosis & meiosis - Cell cycle and molecules that control cell cycle.
Total: 25
TEXT BOOK:
1. Anubha Kaushik, and Kaushik C.P., “Environmental Science and Engineering”, 6th Multicolour Edition, New
Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2018.
2. Lodish. H., Berk A., Zipurursky S.L., Matsudaria P., Baltimore D. and Darnell J., “Molecular Cell Biology”, 4th
Edition, Freeman Press, 2000.
REFERENCES:
1. Palanisamy P.N., Manikandan P., Geetha A., Manjula Rani K., Kowshalya V.N., “Environmental Science”,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, Revised Edition 2019.
2. Satyanarayan, U.,& Chakrapani, U., “Textbook of Biochemistry”,1999 Ed. June 2017

CO1 illustrate the various natural resources and role of individual for its conservation Understanding (K2)
CO2 elaborate the features of ecosystem and biodiversity to find the need for conservation. Understanding (K2)
CO3 manipulate the sources, effects and control methods of various environmental Applying (K3)
pollution.
CO4 make use of the knowledge of EIA and environmental legislation laws towards Applying (K3)
sustainability
CO5 explain the functions of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, nucleic acids, Cells and its Understanding (K2)
organelles

CO1 2 1 3
CO2 2 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 3
CO5 3 1

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 25 40 35 100
CAT2 25 40 35 100
CAT3 NA 100
ESE NA 100
*±3% may be varied (CAT 1,2 – 50 marks)
20ECT51 - ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Programme &
Branch
Signals and Systems, Solid State devices and
Prerequisites 5 PC 3 0 0 3
Circuits
Preamble To endow the fundamentals and analytical perspectives of communication systems.

Unit - I Amplitude Modulation: 9
Introduction: Modulation and its need– Linear modulation schemes: DSBSC, SSBSC and VSB-power spectrum –
Frequency translation – Frequency division multiplexing – Superheterodyne receivers – Noise in AM receivers:
coherent detection, envelope detection.
Unit - II Angle Modulation: 9
Frequency modulation, Narrowband FM, Wideband FM – Generation of FM: indirect method – FM demodulation:
frequency discriminator – Non-linear effects in FM systems – Noise in FM receivers – capture effect – pre-emphasis
and de-emphasis in FM
Unit - III Pulse Modulation and Baseband Pulse Transmission: 9
Sampling process – PAM – Quantization process –PCM – TDM – Delta modulation, Line coding: unipolar NRZ,
Polar NRZ, Unipolar RZ, Manchester – Matched Filter as optimum receiver – Intersymbol Interference – Eye
patterns – Nyquist Criterion for distortion less baseband binary transmission – Pulse shaping with raised cosine filter
– Duobinary signaling – Adaptive equalization : LMS algorithm
Unit - IV Passband Digital Transmission and Spread Spectrum Communication: 9
Introduction – Coherent Phase shift keying: BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, π/4 shifted QPSK – QAM- BER analysis of
BPSK and QPSK-concepts of MSK-Spread Spectrum: PN sequence and its properties- Direct Sequence Spread
Spectrum-Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum
Unit - V Information Theory and Coding: 9

Entropy and its properties – Source coding theorem : Huffman coding, LZ coding – Discrete Memory less Channel –
mutual information and its properties – Channel coding theorem – information capacity theorem; Hamming codes –
Convolutional codes – Trellis diagram– Viterbi algorithm – Trellis coded modulation :8 ary PSK
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Simon Haykin, Michael Moher, "Introduction to Analog and Digital Communications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Simon Haykin, "Digital Communication Systems", 2nd Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi, 2014.
2. GautamSahe, Taub & Schilling, "Principles of Communication Systems", 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2007.

CO1 Apply the concept of amplitude modulation and infer the effect of noise in AM receivers Applying (K3)
CO2 Make use of the concept of narrowband and wide band FM and interpret the effect of noise Applying (K3)
in FM receivers
CO3 Identify the notion of baseband pulse transmission, inter-symbol interference and its Applying (K3)
compensation methods
CO4 apply the scheme of passband digital transmission for band limited and wideband signals Applying (K3)
CO5 inspect the characteristics of discrete memory less channel and provide the solution for Analyzing (K4)
lossless, error free communication

CO1 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 65 25 100
CAT2 15 65 20 100
CAT3 10 50 30 10 100
ESE 10 55 25 10 100
20ECT52 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Signals and system 5 PC 3 0 0 3
Preamble To design and analyze digital signal processing systems and implement in DSP processors.
Unit - I DFT and FFT 9
Review of DFT– Properties of DFT. Radix2-FFT (8-point) : Decimation in Time – Decimation in Frequency –Circular
Convolution and Linear convolution- Overlap add and Overlap Save method.
Unit - II FIR Filter Design: 9

Response of FIR Filter – Group delay & phase delay- Non-Causal Filter design - Causal Filter Design using :
Rectangular –Hamming –Hanning- Blackmann Window-Frequency sampling technique.
Unit - III IIR Filter Design: 9

Analog filter design: Butterworth filter and Chebyshev type-I filters - Digital Transformation : Impulse invariance
technique – Bilinear transformation
Unit - IV Finite Word Length Effect: 9

Quantization noise – Derivation for quantization noise power –Truncation and rounding error – Input quantization
error-Coefficient quantization error-Product quantization error – Limit cycle oscillations- Overflow error-Signal
scaling.
Unit - V DSP Processor and its Implementation 9

Introduction to programmable DSPs –TMS320C67xx –Features and options-Architecture of C67X –Memory
organization-CPU –Introduction to debugging using Code Composer Studio.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Alan V. Oppenheim & Ronald W. Schafer, "Discrete Time Signal Processing", 2nd Edition, Pearson education,
New Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. NagoorKani, "Digital Signal Processing", 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Proakis John G & ManolakisDimtris G, "Digital Signal Processing: Principles, Algorithms and Applications", 4th
Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2018.
3. Venkataramani. B & Bhaskar M, “Digital Signal Processor Architecture, Programming and Application”,
2ndEdition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.

CO1 apply DFT and FFT to find frequency components in a signal. Applying (K3)
CO2 design digital FIR filter for the given specification Applying (K3)
CO3 design digital IIR filter for the given specification. Applying (K3)
CO4 determine the effect of finite word length of infinite response Applying (K3)
CO5 interpret DSP Processor architecture and its Implementation Understanding
(K2)

CO1 3 2 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 40 30 100
CAT2 20 20 60 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 15 35 50 100
20ECT53 - LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Branch Engineering
Preamble To explore the analog systems using op-amp and special function ICs
Unit - I Operational Amplifiers: 9
Internal block diagram of op-amp- Circuits for improving CMRR: Constant current sources, Widlar and Wilson
current sources, Current repeaters. DC Characteristics of op-amp: Input bias current-Input offset current-Input offset
voltage -Thermal drift. AC characteristics of op-amp: Frequency response- Frequency compensation methods -slew
rate.
Unit - II Applications of Operational Amplifier: 9
Ideal Inverting and Non inverting Amplifiers-Adder-Subtractor-Instrumentation amplifier–Differentiator –Integrator –
Comparators-Applications of Comparator: Zero Crossing Detector-Window Detector-Schmitt trigger-Sinewave
generators: RC phase shift oscillator and Wien bridge oscillator.
Unit - III Rectifiers, Active Filters and Regulators: 9
First and Second order low pass and high pass filters. Rectifiers- Half wave rectifier- Full wave rectifier. Regulators-
Voltage regulator IC: Series op-amp regulator (78XX), General Purpose regulator (IC 723)- Switching regulator.
Unit - IV A/D Converter and D/A Converter: 9
Analog to digital Converter: Flash type, Integrating type and Successive Approximation type-Digital to Analog
converter: Weighted resistor type, R-2R ladder type and Inverted R-2R ladder type.
Unit - V Special IC: 9
Timer (IC 555)- Functional block diagram -Astable and Monostable operation –Applications-Phase Locked Loop :
block diagram-Derivation of capture and lock range –Phase detector: Analog phase detector and Digital phase
detector -Voltage controlled Oscillator-Applications.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Roy Choudhry D. & Shail B. Jain, "Linear Integrated Circuits", 5th Edition, New Age International, New Delhi,
2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Gaykwad, Ramakant A., "OP-AMP and Linear IC", 4th Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Salivahanan S. & Kanchanabhaaskaran V.S., "Linear Integrated Circuits", 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Education,
New Delhi, 2018.

CO1 elaborate the need of various current sources circuits for improving CMRR and the DC Understanding (K2)
and AC characteristics of operational amplifier.
CO2 develop different applications of operational amplifiers for the given specification. Applying (K3)
CO3 construct I, II order low pass and high pass filters, rectifiers and regulators. Applying (K3)
CO4 model the different types of A/D and D/A converters. Applying (K3)
CO5 elucidate the astable and monostable multivibrator operation and understand the Understanding (K2)
working principle of PLL and VCO.

CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
20ECL51 ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LABORATORY

Programme &
Branch
Signals and Systems, Solid State Devices and
Prerequisites 5 PC 0 0 2 1
Circuits
Preamble To build a firm foundation on analog and digital communication systems.

1. Verification of analog pulse modulation using discrete components
2. Verification of Pulse code modulation and demodulation
3. Verification of Delta Modulation and demodulation
4. Verification of Time division multiplexing and demultiplexing
5. Simulation of line coding and verification of eye pattern
6. Verification of AM and FM using SDR
7. Simulation of binary modulation (BASK, BFSK, BPSK) and observation through SDR
8. Simulation of M-ary modulation(QPSK, 16QAM) and implementation using SDR
9. Simulation of MSK and implementation using SDR
10. Generation of Huffman coding and decoding
11. Simulation of Linear Block Codes
12. Simulation of Turbo Coding
Total:30
2. MATLAB
3. WiComm – T Kit/USRP Kit

CO1 examine the analog modulation and analog to digital pulse conversion Analyzing (K4),
Manipulation (S2)
CO2 analyze the passband digital modulation Analyzing (K4),
Manipulation (S2)
CO3 Infer the performance of source coding and channel coding Analyzing (K4),
Manipulation (S2)

CO1 3 3 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 3 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 1 1 1
20ECL52 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Signals and system 5 PC 0 0 2 1
To simulate and analyze the frequency components of a signal, digital filters and its
Preamble
implementation using DSP processors
Using MATLAB
1. Generation of signals & basic operation on signals
2. Perform Convolution using FFT and IFFT
3. FIR Filter design and its analysis using Windowing method
4. FIR Filter design and its analysis using Frequency sampling technique
5. Digital IIR Filter design and its analysis using impulse invariant method and bilinear transformation technique
Using SIMULINK
6. Signal generation and basic operation on signals
7. Perform FFT for the signal and plot the frequency spectrum
8. Filter design-FIR and IIR filters
Using DSP PROCESSOR &SIMULINK
9. Signal generation and basic operation on signals
10. Real time signal acquisition and processing in DSP processor
Total:30
2. MATLAB
3. Code Composer Studio

CO1 simulate various continuous and discrete time signals Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO2 design FIR digital filter and IIR digital filter for the given specification Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO3 perform real time signal acquisition and processing in DSP processor Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 1
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2
20ECL53- LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY
Programme&
Branch
Preamble To design amplifiers, oscillators ,multivibrators and op-amp based applications.

1. Simple Applications of Op-Amp circuits- Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, Voltage Follower, Differentiator
and Integrator
2. Applications of comparator: Zero crossing detector and Window detector
3. Design of Schmitt trigger using IC741
4. Design of RC phase shift oscillator and Wien bridge oscillator using Op-Amps
5. Design of a second order Butterworth low-pass and high-pass filter for the given higher and lower cutoff
frequencies
6. Plot the characteristics of Half-wave and precision rectifiers using Op-Amps
7. Examine the characteristics of Voltage regulator using 78xx series
8. Design of R-2R ladder type Digital to Analog Converter and Flash type Analog to Digital Converter
9. Design of timer circuits using IC555 in monostable mode.
10. Mini Project
Total:30

CO1 design the applications of Operational Amplifiers. Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO2 demonstrate the working of special function ICs, IC555 and IC78xx series. Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO3 design and implement real world problems using analog integrated circuits. Analyzing (K4),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2
20GEL51 - PROFESSIONAL SKILLS TRAINING I

(Common to all BE/ BTech / MSc / MCA /BSc Branches)
Programme &
B.E. & ECE Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites NIL 5 EC 0 0 80 2
Preamble This subject is to enhance the employability skills and to develop career competency
Unit - I Soft Skills – I 20
Soft skills and its importance: Pleasure and pains of transition from an academic environment to work environment-
Need for change- Fear, stress and competition in the professional world-Importance of positive attitude- Self
motivation and continuous knowledge upgradation-Self-confidence. Professional grooming and practices: Basics of
corporate culture-Key pillars of business etiquette- Basics of etiquette-Introductions and greetings-Rules of the
handshake, earning respect, business manners-Telephone etiquette- Body Language.
Unit - II Quantitative Aptitude & Logical Reasoning - I 30
Problem solving level I: Number System-LCM &HCF-Divisibility test-Surds and indices-Logarithms- Ratio-
proportions and variation-Partnership-Time speed and distance-Data interpretation-data representation. Logical
reasoning: Family tree-Deductions-Logical connectives-Binary logic Linear arrangements- Circular and complex
arrangement
Unit - III Written Communication & Verbal Aptitude 30
Writing Skills: Writing strategies and formats – Importance of Résumés – Writing a Cover letter – Writing a
fresher’s CV / Résumés – Responding to Job Advertisements – Professional e-mail Writing – Responding to e-
mails and business letters – Technical Report writing – Interpretation of Technical Data (Transcoding) – Writing
One-page Essays. Verbal Aptitude – Synonyms – Antonyms – Homonyms – One word substitution – Idioms
and Phrases – Paired words – Analogies – Spelling test – Cloze test – using suitable verb forms – using
appropriate articles and prepositions; Spotting Errors – Sentence Correction and Formation – Grammar Based
questions (Transformation : Active-Passive & Direct-Indirect); Rearranging Jumbled Sentences & Jumbled
paragraphs, Identifying Facts, Inferences and Judgements statements.
Total: 80
TEXT BOOK:
1 Thorpe, Showick and Edgar Thorpe, “Objective English For Competitive Examination”, 6 th Edition, Pearson India
Education Services Pvt Ltd, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1 Bailey Stephen, “Academic Writing: A practical guide for students”, Routledge, New York, 2011.
2 Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeeta, “Technical Communication - Principles and Practice”, 3rd Edition,
Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2015.

On completion of the course, the students will be able to (Highest
Level)
CO1 develop the soft skills of learners to support them work efficiently in an organization as an Applying (K3),
individual and as a team Precision (S3)
CO2 solve real time problems using numerical ability and logical reasoning Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO3 apply communication skills effectively to understand and deliver information in various Applying (K3),
written discourses grammatically with accuracy Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 2 3 3 3 3 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 50 50 100
CAT3 50 50 100
ESE NA
20ECT61 - VLSI DESIGN
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To impart global understanding of Verilog Hardware Description Language and MOS transistor
characteristics, fabrication and testing of ICs.
Unit - I Verilog HDL: 9
Data flow Modeling- Behavioral modeling – Structured Procedures- Blocking and non blocking statements- delay
control- event control, conditional statements- multiway branching-loops- Switch level modeling - Tasks and
Function
Unit - II Logic Synthesis and RTL Design: 9
Logic Synthesis- Impact of Logic Synthesis- Verilog HDL Synthesis- Synthesis Design Flow- Modeling Tips for Logic
Synthesis- RTL Design- 4-bit full adder subtractor- ALU Design – Booth Multiplication- GCD Computation.
Unit - III MOS Transistor: 9
CMOS Logic- MOS Transistor Theory- Long Channel I-V characteristics- C-V characteristics- Nonideal I-V effects-
DC characteristics-- Power dissipation – Switching Characteristics.
Unit - IV MOS Fabrication: 9
An overview of silicon semiconductor technology - Basic CMOS technology: Nwell- P well, Twin tub and SOI
Process- Latch up and prevention- Layout Design rules- Stick diagram- Layout diagram for basic logic gates-
Introduction to Static CMOS- Pseudo nMOS logic -Dynamic CMOS-Cascade Voltage Switch Logic.
Unit - V CMOS Testing: 9
Introduction to testing- Logic Verification Principles- Test Vectors-Manufacturing test principles- - Fault Models-
observability, controllability –Fault coverage- DFT-Ad-Hoc Testing- Scan Design- BIST- D-Algorithm and Boolean
Difference Method.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Neil Weste & David Harris , "CMOS VLSI Design-A circuits & System Perspective", 4th Edition, Pearson
III,IV,V
education, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Palnitkar Samir, "Verilog HDL: Guide to Digital Design and synthesis", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education ,
I,II
New Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Pucknell, Douglas A & Eshragian K, "Basic VLSI Design", 3rd Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Rabaey J. M, Chandrakasan A & Nikolic B, "Digital integrated circuits: a design perspective", 2nd Edition, PHI
Learning, New Delhi, 2003.

CO1 develop digital logic circuits and VLSI systems using Verilog Hardware Description Applying (K3)
Language Programming.
CO2 illustrate the components in the logic synthesis-based design flow Applying (K3)
CO3 elaborate the characteristics of MOS transistor and techniques used for VLSI fabrication Understanding (K2)
CO4 make use of layout design rules to draw layout of logic functions and to design circuits Applying (K3)
using various logic styles..
CO5 apply various testing techniques/algorithms to test circuits Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO3 3 1 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 20 70 100
CAT2 10 60 30 100
CAT3 20 60 20 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
20ECT62 - DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To acquire adequate knowledge on the function of various internetworking devices, algorithms, protocols
and its applications.
Unit - I Network Architecture: 9
OSI model - TCP/IP model - Guided Media: Twisted pair, Coaxial and Fiber Optic cables Unguided Media: Radio
waves , Micro Waves and Infrared - Circuit switching networks - Datagram Networks - Virtual circuit networks -
Connecting devices : Hub, Bridge, Router, Gateway- Backbone networks.
Unit - II Link Layer (LL): 9

Linear Block Codes - Cyclic Codes – Checksum - Stop and Wait - Go-Back-N - Selective Repeat – Point to Point
Protocol – Random Access :CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA-IEEE 802.3 - Gigabit Ethernet - IEEE 802.11- WLAN.
Unit - III Network Layer: 9
IPV4 Addressing and Datagram format- IPV6 Addressing and Datagram format - Sub-netting - Address mapping:
ARP and RARP – Internet Control Message Protocol - Routing Protocols: DVR , LSR, BGP, OSPF and RIP.
Unit - IV Transport Layer: 9

Process-To-Process Delivery – UDP - TCP - Packet format – Services - Error and flow control - Congestion Control
in TCP – QoS Parameters- Techniques to improve QoS- Token Bucket and Leaky Bucket.
Unit - V Application Layer: 9

E-Mail: Architecture, User Agent, MTA:SMTP,MAA:POP and IMAP- File Transfer Protocol(FTP) - Voice over
IP(VoIP): SIP, H.323 and Domain Name System (DNS) : Name Space, Domain Name Space, Distribution of name
space, DNS in the internet, DHCP, Cryptography: security attacks-plain text-chipper text, symmetric key ciphers :
substitution, transposition ciphers
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, "Data communication and Networking", 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. James F. Kurose & Ross Keith W, "Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet", 6th
Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Tanenbaum, Andrew S & David Wetherall, "Computer Networks", 5th Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2010.

CO1 comprehend different network models and architecture. Understanding (K2)
CO2 apply suitable flow, error and access control techniques for node-to node delivery. Applying (K3)
CO3 analyze the routing mechanisms and IP address management. Analyzing (K4)
CO4 apply suitable protocols for connection oriented and connectionless services in internet. Applying (K3)
CO5 interpret the functionalities of application protocols. Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 2 1 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 3 3
CO5 2 1 3 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 60 20 100
CAT2 20 60 10 10 100
CAT3 10 60 30 100
ESE 20 50 20 10 100
20ECT63 - MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the characteristics of passive microwave components, microwave semiconductor devices
and the measurement of microwave signal parameters.To acquire the knowledge in optical fiber
characteristics and the working of different optical sources and receivers for signal transmission.
Unit - I Microwave Networks and Circuit Representation: 9
Microwave frequency- S parameter representation of N ports – Properties – Advantages - S Matrix of a directional
coupler- Waveguide tees – Isolator – Circulator – Slotted section – Waveguide corners- Bends- Twists-Matched
loads.
Unit - II Microwave Semiconductor Devices and Vacuum Tubes: 9

Gunn diode-Gunn effect-RWH theory – Avalanche transit time devices - Read diode– TRAPATT diodes - Reflex
klystron: Velocity modulation - Power output - Efficiency and electronic admittance-Magnetron: Cylindrical
magnetron.
Unit - III Microstriplines and Microwave Measurements: 9

Microstrip lines – Losses in microstrip lines – Quality factor Q of microstrip lines. Measurements: Impedance –
Frequency – Power – VSWR- Microstrip lines filters:LPF, diodes and mixers.
Unit - IV Optical Fiber Structures and Digital Transmission Systems: 9

Elements of an optical fiber transmission link- Total internal reflection, Acceptance angle, Numerical aperture –
Optical fiber modes and configurations – Linearly polarized modes - Fiber fabrication.
Unit - V Optic Sources and Optical Receivers: 9

Direct and indirect band gap materials- LED structures: SLED,ELED – Concept of lasers diodes- Operation of PIN
and APD diodes- Fundamental receiver operation – Error sources- Probability of error - Point to point link system
considerations- Link power Budget and rise time budget.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Samuel Y. Liao, "Microwave Devices & Circuits", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2015. I,II,III
2. Gerd Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication", 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2020. IV,V
REFERENCES:
1. Annapurna Das & Sisir K. Das, "Microwave Engineering", 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Inc, New Delhi, 2019.
2. John M. Senior, "Optical Fiber Communication", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2010.

CO1 comprehend the features and characteristics of microwave components. Understanding (K2)
CO2 illustrate the principles for the measurement of microwave signal parameters. Understanding(K2)
CO3 Apply the principles involved in microstrip lines and mixers for communication. Applying(K3)
CO4 infer the different modes of wave propagation and configuration of optical fibre. Understanding (K2)
CO5 describe the characteristics of various optical sources and receivers Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 1 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 1 1
CO3 2 1 2 2 3 2 1 1
CO4 2 1 3 1 2 1
CO5 2 1 1 1 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 25 75 100
CAT2 15 65 20 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 15 65 20 100
20ECL61 - VLSI DESIGN LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To design and implement digital circuits using Verilog Hardware Description Language
1. Design of 16x1 multiplexer using structural modeling.

2. Design of 8 bit carry look ahead adder and BCD adder
3. Modeling of Sequential Digital Systems
4. Modeling of State Machine Design
5. Modeling of Memory Design
6. Design of 4 * 4 array multiplier using structural modeling
7. Design and implementation of 4-bit Adder-Subtractor Unit
8. Design and implementation of ALU
9. Design and implementation of Booth multiplier
10. Design and implementation of Real Time Clock
11. Design of Full adder using CMOS transistor
12. Design of D-Flipflop using CMOS transistor
Total:30
2. Modelsim, Xilinx and any SPICE Package

CO1 design digital systems using Verilog Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO2 implement digital systems in FPGA Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO3 design digital circuits at transistor level Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
20ECL62 - DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING LABORATORY
Programme &
Branch
To gain a hands-on experience in the field of computer networking such as creating different
Preamble network topologies, network protocol implementation and analysing the performance using
standard metrics
1. Design and implement network topologies: Star, Bus, Mesh, Ring

2. Analyze the functioning of ARQ mechanism: Stop & Wait, GoBack N and Selective Repeat
3. Realization of ARP and Subnetting using IPV4 in campus area network.
4. Analyze the functioning of Distance vector routing & Link state routing in intra domain routers.
5. Analyze the network load performance using Leaky bucket algorithm
6. Demonstrate data exchange using UDP: Server-Client Model
7. Realization of TCP ON-OFF Applications in client server model
8. Realization of TCP: Bulk Transfer Applications in client server model
9. Creation of Dumbbell and Parking lot topologies for TCP and UDP traffic
10. Packet capture and analysis using network protocol analyzer
11. Realization of Symmetric key cryptographic algorithm
Total:30
2. Netsim,NS-3, Wireshark

CO1 apply different network layer topologies. Applying (K3),
Manipulation (S2)
CO2 analyse L2, L3 and L4 protocols under different traffic conditions. Analyzing (K4),
Manipulation (S2)
CO3 analyse different data packets using packet capture tools. Analyzing (K4),
Manipulation (S2)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2
20ECL63 - MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL COMMUNICATION LABORATORY

Programme &
Branch
Preamble To measure and analyze the microwave and optical parameters

1. Demonstrate the mode characteristics of Reflex Klystron.
2. Observe the radiation characteristics of Horn antenna
3. Verification of load impedance using VSWR
4. Observe the VI characteristics and Power measurement of Gunn Diode oscillator
5. Design and simulate the Magic Tee
6. Design and simulate the microstrip LPF using transmission line step impedance method
7. Measurement of numerical aperture and Digital signal transmission using fibre-optic
8. Observe the VI & PI characteristics of LED and Laser diode.
9. Observe the mode characteristics of an optical fibre using Laser diode
10. Observe the VI & PI characteristics of APD/PD.
11. Analyze the S-Parameter of power amplifier, mixer.
12. Observe the effective refractive index of the optical fiber using MATLAB.
Total:30
2. HFSS, ADS,MATLAB

CO1 describe the performance of microwave oscillators and its signal parameters using a Applying(K3),
microwave set-up. Manipulation (S2)
CO2 Illustrate the characteristics of Magic Tee and microstrip transmission lines,S- Applying(K3)
parameter of power amplifier and mixers. Precision (S3)
CO3 Observe the characteristics of optical source, fibre and detector. Applying(K3)
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 2
20GEL61 PROFESSIONAL SKILLS TRAINING II
(Common to all BE/ BTech / MSc/ MCA /BSc Branches)
Programme & B.E. & ECE Sem. Category L T P Credit

Branch
Prerequisites NIL 6 EC 0 0 80 2
Preamble This subject is to enhance the employability skills and to develop career competency
Unit - I Soft Skills – II 20
Group discussions: Advantages of group discussions-Structured GD- Team work: Value of team work in
organizations- Definition of a team, why team-Elements of leadership, disadvantages of a team, stages of team
formation- Group development activities. Facing an interview: Foundation in core subject- industry orientation /
knowledge about the company- professional personality-Communication skills-Activities before Interview, upon
entering interview room, during the interview and at the end Mock interviews.
Unit - II Quantitative Aptitude & Logical Reasoning - II 30
Problem solving level II: Money related problems-Mixtures-Symbol base problem-Clocks and calendars-Simple-
linear-quadratic and polynomial equations-Special, equations-Inequalities-Sequence and series-Set theory-
Permutations and combinations-Probability-Statistics-Data sufficiency- Geometry-Trigonometry-Heights and
distances-Co-ordinate geometry-Mensuration. Logical reasoning: Conditionality and grouping-Sequencing and
scheduling- Selections-Networks:-Codes; Cubes-Venn diagram in logical reasoning- Quant based reasoning-Flaw
detection- Puzzles-Cryptarithms.
Unit - III Reading & Speaking Skills 30
Reading: Reading comprehension– Effective Reading strategies – Descriptive, Inferential, & Argumentative reading
passages – Identifying and locating factual information within a text – global reading/skimming for general
understanding – selective comprehension / scanning for specific information – detailed comprehension / intensive
reading – understanding the development of an argument – identifying the writer’s attitude and opinions – Reading
news articles in business magazines, newspapers – Reading notices and book reviews –Interpreting graphic data &
Advertisements. Speaking: Mock Interviews –Self-Introduction – Sharing of Real Time Experience; Conversational
Practices –Role Play – Short Talks / TED Talks –Extempore; Giving a Presentation on Various Topics – Technical /
Non-Technical Topics – Project Review Presentation – Oratory and Effective Public Speaking; Pair Discussion –
Group Discussion – The process of Group Discussion – Strategies to be adopted – Skills Assessed – Telephonic
Conversations & Skills – Negotiating Skills.
Total: 80
TEXT BOOK:
Thorpe, Showick and Edgar Thorpe, “Objective English For Competitive Examination”, 6 th Edition, Pearson India
1
Education Services Pvt Ltd, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1 Aruna Koneru, “Professional Speaking Skills,” Oxford University Press India, 2015.
2 Thorpe, Showick and Edgar Thorpe, “Winning at Interviews,” 5 th edition, Pearson Education, India, 2013.
3 Rizvi, Ashraf M, “Effective Technical Communication,” 2 nd Edition, McGraw Hill Education India, 2017.

Develop the soft skills of learners to support them work efficiently in an organization as an Applying (K3),
CO1
individual and as a team Precision (S3)
Solve real time problems using numerical ability and logical reasoning Applying (K3),
CO2
Precision (S3)
Apply reading and speaking skills effectively for various academic and professional Applying (K3),
CO3
purposes Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 0 0 0 3 3 0 3 0 3 2
CO2 3 2 0 0 0 3 3 0 3 0 3 2
CO3 0 2 0 0 0 3 3 0 3 3 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 50 50 100
CAT3 50 50 100
ESE
20ECT71 - ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION
Programme &
B.E &ECE Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Electromagnetic Fields 7 PC 3 0 2 4
Preamble To design and analyze the state of the art in antenna based on fundamental principle and understand its
parameter measurements.
Unit - I Fundamentals of Antenna: 9
Radiation from Hertzian- Power radiated and radiation resistance, half-wave dipole– Power radiated and radiation
resistance –– Definitions: Radiation intensity – Directive gain – Directivity – Power gain – Beam width – Bandwidth –
Gain, Folded dipole – Baluns- Effective length and effective area – Relation between maximum aperture and gain,
Transmission between two antennas
Unit - II Antenna Arrays: 9
Expression for electric field from two element arrays: Broadside and endfire array–Uniform linear array–Method of
pattern multiplication –Binomial array- Yagi Uda antenna, Log periodic dipole array, Smart antennas
Unit - III Special and Aperture Antennas: 9
Helical antenna: Normal mode and axial mode of radiation, Horn antenna, Babinet’s principle and complementary
antennas, Slot antennas, Antenna with Parabolic reflectors, Microstrip patch antenna: Rectangular patch:
transmission line model design procedure
Unit - IV Propagation of Radio Waves: 9
Ground wave propagation - Tropospheric wave propagation-line of sight distance- effective earth’s radius, Filed
strength of Tropospheric wave - Sky wave propagation – effective dielectric constant and conductivity of ionosphere-
Virtual height- Critical frequency - Maximum usable frequency – Skip distance
Unit - V Antenna Measurements: 9
Antenna Measurement Ranges- Antenna impedance measurement– Radiation Pattern measurements–
Measurement of Antenna gain – Measurement of Radiation resistance – Antenna efficiency – Polarization
1. Demonstrate and plot the radiation pattern of dipole antenna using antenna chamber
2. Demonstrate and plot the radiation pattern of Yagi-uda antenna using antenna chamber
3. Demonstrate and plot the radiation pattern of Helical antenna using antenna chamber
4. Design and simulate a rectangular microstrip patch antenna
5. Design and simulate a circular microstrip patch antenna
6. Simulate a microstrip patch antenna array and observe its radiation characteristics using antenna chamber
7. Observe the S-parameters of antenna using Vector Network analyzer
TEXT BOOK:
1. Prasad K.D, "Antennas and Wave Propagation", 4th Edition, SatyaPrakashan Publications, New Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Kraus John D& Marhefka Ronald J& Ahmad S. Khan, "Antennas and Wave Propagation", 5th Edition,
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Balanis Constantine A, "Antenna Theory", 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2016.

CO1 infer the concept of antenna parameters and its terminologies Understanding (K2)
CO2 Illustrate the performance of antenna array with its radiation pattern Applying (K3)
CO3 interpret the characteristics of special antennas Applying (K3)
CO4 describe the different types of wave propagation effects on the atmospheric layers Understanding (K2)
CO5 comprehend the importance of antenna parameter measurements Understanding (K2)
CO6 demonstrate the radiation performance of dipole, helical and yagiuda antenna using Applying (K3),
antenna chamber Precision (S3)
CO7 design and simulate the microstrip patch antenna and its array characteristics Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8 Observe the characteristics of antenna using VNA Applying (K3),
Manipulation (S2)

CO1 3 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO4 2 1
CO5 2 1
CO6 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO7 3 2 1 1 3 3 3 3
CO8 3 2 1 1 3 3 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 15 75 10 100
CAT2 15 65 20 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 15 65 20 100
PROFESSONAL ELECTIVES
20ECE01 - TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Electromagnetic Fields 5 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To acquire the concepts of different types of transmission lines with its parameters and gains a complete
understanding of stub matching and its design using smith chart. Also understands the concepts of wave
propagation in different guided and waveguide structures.
Unit - I Transmission Line Parameters: 9
A line of cascaded T sections - Transmission lines - General solution - Physical significance of the equations - the
infinite line- Wavelength –Velocity – propagation - distortionless line -The telephone cable - Reflection on a line not
terminated in Zo - Reflection coefficient - Open and short circuited lines - Insertion loss.
Unit - II The Line at Radio Frequency: 9
Parameters of open wire line and Coaxial cable at RF - Line constants for zero dissipation -Voltages and currents on
the dissipationless line -Standing waves -Nodes and antinodes- Standing wave ratio - Input impedance of the
dissipationless line -Input impedance of open and short circuited lines -Power and impedance measurement on lines
-The eighth wave- The quarter wave line- The Half wave line.
Unit - III Stub Matching and Smith Chart: 9
Stub Matching-Derivations of single stub impedance matching on a line-Smith circle diagram- Smith chart
application: Plotting complex impedance- Admittance for given impedance- Input impedance of a TL terminated in a
short or open -Input impedance of a TL at any distance from a load- Locating first maximum and minimum from any
load- Matching a TL to a load with a parallel tuning stub
Unit - IV Guided Waves: 9
Waves between parallel planes of perfect conductors- Field Equations , TE waves, TM waves, Characteristics of TE
and TM waves, Attenuation of TE and TM waves in parallel plane guides, TEM Waves.
Unit - V Waveguides and Resonators 9
Rectangular Waveguides: Field equations, TM waves, TE waves, Characteristic of TE and TM Waves,
Impossibility of TEM waves, Dominant mode, Characteristic impedance ,Excitation of modes.
Resonators: Microwave cavity resonator ,Rectangular cavity resonators ,Q factor of a cavity resonator forTE101
mode.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Ryder J.D, "Networks Lines and Fields", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Raju G.S.N, "Electromagnetic Field Theory and Transmission Lines", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2009.
2. Umesh Sinha, "Transmission Lines and Networks", 1st Edition, SatyaPrakasan, New Delhi, 2020.

CO1 compute the parameters of transmission lines. Applying (K3)
CO2 determine the parameter of transmission line at radio frequency and the impedance Applying (K3)
value for different lengths of line
CO3 make use of Smith Chart for design of transmission lines and Stub Matching Applying (K3)
CO4 compute the field equations, characteristics and performance parameters for guided Applying (K3)
waves
CO5 determine the field equations, characteristics and performance parameters for Applying (K3)
rectangular waveguides and rectangular cavity resonators.

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 3 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 30 40 - - - 100
CAT2 10 30 60 - - - 100
CAT3 10 30 60 - - - 100
ESE 20 20 60 - - - 100
20ECE02 - MICROCONTROLLER BASED AUTOMATION

Programme&
Branch
Prerequisites Microprocessor and Microcontroller 5 PE 2 0 2 3
Preamble Interpret the concepts of microcontroller, display devices and sensors to make an automated embedded
product
Unit - I Introduction to 8 bit Microcontroller: 6
Architecture of PIC 16F877A- Register file structure -CPU Register- Status Register- Instruction sets- Addressing
modes -Simple programs using ALP- Oscillator and reset circuits.
Unit - II Memory Organization: 6

Program memory- Data memory- On-chip Peripherals: Timers-Compare-Capture and PWM Modules- Interrupts-
Watchdog timer
Unit - III PIC Programming in C: 6

Simple I/O port programming-LED-7 segment – switch-Timer programming – ADC-USART.
Unit - IV Case Studies: Boiler and Conveyer 6

Automation in boilers - Temperature, Pressure, Water level-display in LCD-Automation in conveyor based LPG
cylinder filling - cylinder count - weight - sealing-display in 7 segment.
Unit - V Case Studies: Clock and Electric Vehicle 6

Digital Alarm clock using real time clock interfacing through I2C protocol-time, date, day, alarm time-display in LCD-
DC motor based speed and direction control for electric vehicles.

1. Device ON / OFF using PIC 16F877A microcontroller (Relay and LED).
2. Interfacing of 7-segment and switch with PIC 16F877A microcontroller.
3. Interfacing of LCD with PIC 16F877A microcontroller.
4. Timer interrupt programming in PIC16F877A microcontroller.
5. Analog sensor interfacing with PIC16F877A microcontroller.
6. PWM based speed control of DC motor using PIC16F877A microcontroller.
7. Interfacing of Real Time Clock with PIC 16F877A microcontroller.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Peatman& John B, "Design with PIC Microcontrollers", 1st Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi,Danny Causey, Rolin D McKinlay, "PIC Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using
Assembly and C For PIC 18", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2021.
2. MykePredko, "Programming and customizing the PIC Microcontroller", 3rd Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill, Delhi,
2008.
3. http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/39582C.pdf

CO1 comprehend the architecture and concepts of PIC microcontroller Understanding (K2)
CO2 illustrate the working principle of internal peripherals in PIC microcontroller and its Understanding (K2)
applications
CO3 apply embedded C programming skills for on-chip peripherals in real applications Applying (K3)
using PIC microcontroller
CO4 develop embedded C program for automation process in boilers and conveyor based Applying (K3)
LPG cylinder filling
CO5 build embedded C program for digital Alarm clock through I2C protocol and Speed Applying (K3)
Control using DC motor for electric vehicles.
CO6 write efficient embedded C programs for interfacing external peripherals Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO7 write efficient embedded C programs for interfacing internal modules Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8 design and develop microcontroller based applications using motor and real time Applying (K3),
clock Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 1
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 3
CO4 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 3 3 2
CO5 3 1 2 3 3 1 3 3 2
CO6 3 2 3 2 2 2
CO7 3 2 3 2 2 2
CO8 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 45 45 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
20ECE03 - MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 5 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To understand the working of the various physiological systems in the human body and also to
comprehend the basics of bio signals recording, various diagnostic , therapeutic devices and techniques
Unit - I Human Physiology: 9
Physiological systems of the Body - Basic medical instrumentation system and its performance requirements -
General constraints in design of medical instrumentation systems -Origin of bioelectric signals -Propagation of action
potentials- Bioelectric potentials : ECG,EEG and EMG
Unit - II Basic Medical Recording System: 9

Electrodes for ECG - Electrodes for EEG - Electrodes for EMG - Basic recording system -General consideration for
electronic recorder amplifiers -Preamplifiers - Sources of noise in low level recording circuits -The main amplifier and
driver stage
Unit - III Recording and Monitoring Instruments: 9

Basic electrocardiograph machine - ECG leads - Phonocardiograph -Electroencephalograph - Electromyograph -
Common artefacts in ECG and EMG -Measurement of heart rate- direct method of Blood pressure measurement -
Carbon di-oxide method of respiration rate measurement -Single channel telemetry systems - Temperature
telemetry system -Multichannel wireless telemetry system
Unit - IV Measurements and Analysis Techniques: 9

Basic principles of external cardiac pacemaker and ventricular synchronous demand pacemaker - Basic principles of
a defibrillator- Electric shock hazards -Leakage currents - Test instruments for checking safety parameters of
biomedical equipment- ECG arrhythmia monitoring system
Unit - V Medical Instrumentation: 9

Haemodialysis machine -Radio isotopes in medical diagnosis- Positron Emission Tomography (PET) scanner -
Surgical diathermy machine- Electrodes used with surgical diathermy -Safety aspects in electrosurgical units
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Khandpur R. S, "Handbook of biomedical instrumentation", 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Cromwell Leslie, Weibell Fred J & Pfeiffer Erich A, "Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements", 2nd
Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2015.
2. Reddy D.C., "Biomedical Signal Processing – Principles and Techniques", 1st Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2008.

CO1 comprehend the physiological systems of the human body Understanding (K2)
CO2 paraphrase types of electrodes used in measurement of bio signals in recording Understanding (K2)
system
CO3 Compute the parameters of human system using the principles of recording and Applying (K3)
monitoring instruments
CO4 describe the various measurement techniques and the need for electrical safety of Understanding (K2)
biomedical devices
CO5 explain the working principles of few medical instruments Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 25 75 100
CAT2 15 50 35 100
CAT3 20 80 - 100
ESE 20 60 20 100
20ECE04 - COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND INTERFACING
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Digital Electronics 5 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To understand the fundamental structure of computer system and design of various functional units
used to build the high performance processors and systems.
Unit - I Structure of Computers and Machine Instructions: 9
Functional units- Basic operational concepts - Bus structures - Software - Performance – Memory locations,
Addresses and operations – Instruction and instruction sequencing – Addressing modes – Basic I/O operations –
Stacks and queues.
Unit - II Computer Arithmetic: 9

Addition and subtraction of signed numbers – Design of fast adders – Multiplication of positive numbers- Signed-
Operand multiplication and Fast multiplication – Integer division – Floating point numbers and operations: IEEE
standard for floating point numbers.
Unit - III Basic Processing and Memory Unit: 9
Fundamental concepts – Execution of a complete instruction – Multiple bus organization – Hardwired Control -
Semiconductor RAMs, ROMs – Speed, size and cost – Cache memories – Mapping functions- Virtual memory –
Address translation.
Unit - IV Input and Output: 9

External Devices - I/O modules - Programmed I/O - Interrupt-Driven I/O - Direct Memory Access - I/O Channels and
Processors
Unit - V Computer Peripherals and Multicomputers: 9
Input Devices - Output Devices - Serial Communication Links: Asynchronous Transmission - Synchronous
Transmission - Standard Communications - Multicomputers: Local Area Networks - Ethernet Bus - Token Ring -
Network of Workstations.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Hamacher Carl, VranesicZvonko & ZakySafwat, "Computer Organization", 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2011.
REFERENCES:
1. Stallings William, "Computer Organization and Architecture: Designing for Performance", 11th Edition,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Hayes John P, "Computer Architecture and Organization", 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017.

CO1 describe the basic structure and operation of a digital computer Understanding
(K2)
CO2 design fast adder and fast multiplier for arithmetic operations for ALU Applying (K3)
CO3 design memory sub-system for a typical computer Applying (K3)
CO4 understand various types I/O devices and memory organization Understanding
(K2)
CO5 Infer serial communication methods and networking standards Understanding
(K2)

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 15 50 35 100
CAT3 20 80 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
20ECE05 - OPTO ELECTRONICS
Programme &
Branch
Physics For Communication And Computer
Prerequisites 5 PE 3 0 0 3
Science Engineering
Preamble To learn different types of display devices, detection mechanism and optoelectronic integrated circuits
with applications
Unit - I Elements of Light, Solid State Physics: 9
Wave nature of light- Polarization interference- Diffraction- Light Source- Review of quantum mechanical concept-
Review of solid state physics- Review of semiconductor physics and semiconductor junction device
Unit - II Display Devices and Lasers: 9

Photo luminescence- Cathode luminescence- Electro luminescence- Injection luminescence- LEDS plasma display-
Introduction to OLED- Liquid crystal displays- Numeric displays laser emission- Absorption- Radiation- Population
inversion optical feedback- Threshold condition-Line shape function-Pumping - Laser modes- Classes of lasers-
Mode locking- Q switching- Laser applications-Measurements of distance –Holography -Laser induced nuclear
fusion
Unit - III Optical Detectors: 9

Photo detector- Thermal detector- Photo devices- Photo emissive devices-Photomultiplier- Noise in Photomultiplier-
Photon counting technique- Image intensifier - Photo conductive detectors- Noise in photoconductive detectors -
Junction detectors- Detector array - Detector performance
Unit - IV Optoelectronic Modulator: 9

Introduction- Analog and digital modulation Franz-Keldysh and Stark effect modulators: Quantum well - Electro
absorption modulators- Electro optic modulators- Magneto optic devices- Acousto optic devices- Optical switching
and logic devices.
Unit - V Integrated Circuits: 9

Introduction to optoelectronic ICs- Hybrid and monolithic integration- Application of optoelectronic integrated circuits-
Integrated transmitters and receivers- Guided wave devices
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Wilson J & Hawkes J, Opto-electronics: An Introduction, 3rd Edition, PHI Learning , New Delhi, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Pallab Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Opto-electronic Devices, 2nd Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Emmanuel Rosencher and Berge Vinter, Optoelectronics, 1st Edition, Cambridge University Press, New York,
2002.

CO1 interpret the state-of-art optoelectronic technology Understanding
(K2)
CO2 apply quantum mechanics and its role in the design and operation of optoelectronic devices Applying (K3)
CO3 perceive semiconductor material properties and semiconductor optoelectronic device Understanding
physics (K2)
CO4 apply analog and digital modulation techniques for optical modulators, Magnetic and Applying (K3)
Switching applications
CO5 apply the concepts of Integrated circuit theory for the design of optoelectronics systems Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1
CO2 2 3 1 2 1 1
CO3 2 3 1 1 1 2
CO4 2 3 1 1 1 2
CO5 2 2 3 2 1 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 45 35 100
CAT2 10 35 55 100
CAT3 10 35 55 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
20ECE06 - SOFT COMPUTATIONAL TECHNIQUES
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To learn and understand Neural Network algorithms and Fuzzy inference systems for solving real time
problems
Unit - I Introduction To Neural Networks: 9
Introduction, Humans and Computers, Organization of the Brain, Biological Neuron, characteristics of ANN, Types of
Neuron Activation Function, Terminologies of ANN - Learning Strategy (Supervised, Unsupervised, Reinforcement) -
McCulloch-Pitts Model – Hebb Rule.
Unit - II Learning Networks: 9
Supervised Learning Networks: Perceptron Network : Theory – Architecture- Learning Rule, Back Propagation
Network : Theory – Architecture- Training and Testing Algorithm - Adaptive linear neuron - Radial Basis Function
Network (RBFN) - Associative memory networks: Discrete hop field network - Kohonen self organising feature maps.
Unit - III Advanced Neural Network: 9
Support Vector Machine Classifier – Decision tree classifier-Random Forest Classifier – Extreme Learning Machine (
Training and testing algorithms only)
Unit - IV Basic Concepts of Fuzzy Logic: 9

Introduction to fuzzy logic - Classical sets and fuzzy sets - Fuzzy relations - Membership function: Features of
membership function – Fuzzification - Methods of membership value assignments - Fuzzy rules and reasoning:
Fuzzy If-Then Rules
Unit - V Fuzzy Inference Systems (FIS): 9

Introduction – Methods of FIS: Mamdani - Sugeno and Tsukamoto. Defuzzification: Lambda-Cuts for Fuzzy sets and
Fuzzy Relations, Defuzzification Methods Applications of Neural networks and Fuzzy logic: In image processing-
forecasting –communication-business
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. S.Rajasekharan & G. A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Systems and Evolutionary algorithms:
synthesis and applications", 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Timothy J.Ross, "Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications", 3rd Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Sivanandam S.N, Sumathi S & Deepa S.N, "Introduction to Neural Networks using MATLAB 6.0", 1st Edition,
Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.

CO1 interpret the concepts of neural network Understanding (K2)
CO2 develop neural network architecture using supervised and unsupervised learning Applying (K3)
CO3 interpret the concepts of SVM, ELM and random forest classifiers Understanding (K2)
CO4 Develop fuzzy sets and rules for real time applications Applying (K3)
CO5 apply FIS models and neural network for real time applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 40 50 100
CAT2 25 45 30 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 20 30 50 100
20ECE07 LINUX OPERATING SYSTEMS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites NIL 5 PE 2 0 2 3
Preamble This course provides the foundations for understanding of the open source platform.
Unit - I Linux Introduction 6
Linux History , Distribution, Installing of Linux, First step on command line - man pages, Working with directories,
files, file contents, Linux file tree
Unit - II Shell Expansion 6
Commands and arguments, Control operators, Shell Variable, Shell embedding, file globbling.
Unit - III Pipes and Commands 6
I/O redirection, filters, basic Unix tool, Regular expression.
Unit - IV Vi Editor and Scripting 6
Introduction to vi, Scripting: Introduction, loops, parameters, more scripting.
Unit - V Case Studies 6
Scripting for auto startup applications – application package installation - Linux in single board computer – simple
Linux application development.
1. Display the architecture of Linux running and flash .iso into USB pen drive attached and verifies both are
same.
2. List all "current shell variables", files in "/bin" directory and create new directory in the Desktop from the home
directory.
3. Create a file that contains the history of commands used in the file named as my_his.txt and also display the
date in YYYY/MM/DD format
4. Find and replace the pattern of string in the File using VI editor
5. Create a file and write some message and save it.
6. Write the script that have to shut down your system properly at 04:30PM daily
7. Write the script to auto startup of some specific application when the system is booted.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Paul Cobbaut ,“Linux Fundamentals” , GNU Free Documentation License 2015
REFERENCES:
1. https://www.linux.org/docs/
2. https://www.raspberrypi.com/documentation/computers/using_linux.html

CO1 realize different Linux distributions and Linux file tree Understanding(K2)
CO2 use Linux commands and apply shell operators Applying(K3)
CO3 realize pipe commands and regular expressions Applying(K3)
CO4 comprehend editor and apply shell scripting knowledge for automation Applying(K3)
CO5 separate pattern matching from files Understanding(K2)
CO6 reveal the execution of Linux commands Applying(K3),
Precision(S3)
CO7 demonstrate the execution in usage of regular expression using vi editor Applying(K3),
Precision(S3)
CO8 expose the execution of application in auto startup mode Applying(K3),
Precision(S3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2
CO4 2 3 2 3 3 2 2
CO5 2 2 1 2 1 1 2
CO6 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO7 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO8 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 60 10 100
CAT2 15 60 25 100
CAT3 15 55 30 100
ESE 15 60 25 100
PE: GROUP-II
20ECE08 - MOBILE COMMUNICATION

Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Analog & Digital communication 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To acquire the fundamental concepts in cellular communication technology and articulate the study of
4th generation and 5th generation mobile technologies.
Unit - I Cellular Concept 9
Frequency reuse–Channel assignment strategies, Handoff strategies, Interference and system capacity, Co-channel
interference and system capacity- improving coverage and capacity
Unit - II Propagation models and Channel Models 9
Large Scale Propagation: Free space propagation model- Terrestrial propagation: Reflection- Two ray ground model
– Knife edge diffraction model - Scattering model – Outdoor propagation model – Durkin model
Small-scale multipath propagation and measurements - Mobile multipath channel parameters - Types of small-scale
fading- Rayleigh and Rician channel models
Unit - III : Equalizers and Diversity Techniques 9

Introduction to equalization, A generic adaptive equalizer, Linear equalizers, nonlinear equalizers- Equalizer
algorithms – Zero forcing- Least mean square- Selection diversity, Maximum Ratio diversity - RAKE receiver
Unit - IV Multiple Access Techniques for Wireless Communications 9

FDMA-TDMA- Spread spectrum multiple access-Capacity of cellular CDMA – SDMA- WCDMA- Packet radio
protocols- Capture effect in packet radio
Unit - V 4G Wireless Communication 9
System Architecture Evolution – Architecture of LTE : High Level Architecture, User Equipment, Evolved UMTS
Terrestrial Radio Access Network, Evolved Packet Core, Roaming Architecture–OFDMA in a Mobile Cellular
Network : Multiple Access, Fractional Frequency Re-Use, Channel Estimation– SCFDMA
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Rappaport S. Theodore, ―Wireless Communications, 2 nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Christopher Cox. An Introduction to LTE: LTE, LTE Advanced, SAE, VoLTE and 4G Mobile Communications,
2nd Edition, Wiley Publications, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Saad Z. Asif. 5G Mobile Communications Concepts and Technologies, 1st Edition, CRC Press Taylor & Francis
Group, USA, 2019.

CO1 understand the cellular concept and its coverage with capacity improvement techniques. Understanding
(K2)
CO2 characterize the propagation models and channel models Applying (K3)
CO3 illustrate the effects of multipath propagation and the compensation by diversity and Applying (K3)
equalization
CO4 elaborate the concepts of multiple access techniques for real world problems Understanding
(K2)
CO5 interpret the characteristics of 4G wireless networks Understanding
(K2)

CO1 3 1 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 1 1
CO5 3 1 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 40 30 100
CAT2 15 30 55 100
CAT3 30 70 100
ESE 30 50 20 100
20ECE09- EMBEDDED SYSTEMS DESIGN

Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the concept of embedded system life cycle including partitioning, toolset, emulators and
testing.
Unit - I Embedded Design Life Cycle: 9
Embedded design life cycle – Product specification – Hardware / Software partitioning – Detailed hardware and
software design – Integration – Product testing selection processes –Performance tools – Benchmark – RTOS
availability – Tool chain availability – Other issues in selection processes.
Unit - II Partitioning Decision: 9
Hardware / Software duality – Coding hardware – ASIC revolution - Managing the risk – Co-verification – Execution
environment – Memory organization –System start-up – Hardware manipulation – Memory mapped access –Speed
and code density.
Unit - III Embedded Toolset: 9
Interrupt service routines – Watch dog timers – Flash memory - Basic toolset – Host Based debugging – Remote
debugging – ROM emulators – Logic analyzer – Caches – BDM – JTAG
Unit - IV In circuit Emulators: 9
Bullet proof run control – Real time trace – Hardware break points – Overlay memory – Timing constraints – Usage
issues – Triggers
Unit - V Testing: 9
Bug tracking – Reduction of risks & costs – Performance – Unit testing – Regression testing – Choosing test cases –
Functional tests – Coverage tests – Testing embedded software – Performance testing – Maintenance
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Arnold S.Berger, Embedded Systems Design: An Introduction to Processes, Tools, and Techniques Hardcover,
1st Edition,CRC press,USA, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Sri ram Iyer, Embedded Realtime System Programming , 1 stEdition, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
2. David E.Simon, An Embedded Software Primer ,12th Indian Reprint, Pearson Education, 2005.

CO1 comprehend the design flow of an embedded system Understanding (K2)
CO2 understand the software hardware duality of embedded system design and memory Understanding (K2)
organization
CO3 use various tools for hardware- software debugging Applying (K3)
CO4 Infer software debugging using emulator for embedded product Understanding (K2)
CO5 understand the different types of testing in embedded system Understanding (K2)

CO1 3
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 3 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 20 80 100
ESE 15 60 25 100
20ECE10 MODERN ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the principles of various instruments and transducers in industrial use and learn Virtual
Instrumentation and its importance in design of systems.
Unit - I Measurement Concepts and Measuring Instruments: 9
Measurement systems- Static and dynamic characteristics – Units and standards of measurements – Error analysis
– Moving coil – Torque equations - DC Ammeters-DC Voltmeters-Digital meters: Wattmeter-Energy meters – Bridge
measurements: Maxwell- Kelvin- Schering.
Unit - II Transducers: 9
Strain gauge- Thermistor - Humidity sensor- Variable reluctance transducers – Linear variable differential
transformer- Capacitive transducer – Piezoelectric transducers – Vibration sensor– Proximity sensor- Optoelectronic
transducers-
Implementation of Instrumentation amplifier with sensor.
Unit - III Virtual Instrumentation & Software: 9
Block diagram of a virtual instrument – Physical quantities and analog interfaces - Hardware and software – User
interfaces – Advantages– Architecture of a virtual instrument and its relation to the operating system - LabVIEW –
Graphical user interfaces - Controls and indicators.
Unit - IV VI Software Tools & Programming Techniques: 9
Editing, debugging and running a virtual instrument – Graphical programming palettes and tools – Front panel
objects – Function and libraries– VI and sub-VI Decision structures - Formula nodes – Sequence structures – Arrays
and clusters – String and file I/O – High level and Low level file I/Os – Attribute nodes- Local and global variables.
Unit - V PLC Programming: 9
PLC: Evolution – Components of PLC – Advantages over relay logic – PLC programming languages – Ladder
diagram – Programming timers and counters –PLC specifications – Timer functions: Types, Programming - Counter
functions: Types, Programming
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Helfrick Albert D. and Cooper William D., ―Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques,
2nd Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2003, I,II
2. Jeffery Travis and Jim Kring, ―LabVIEW for Everyone: Graphical programming made easy and Fun, 3rd
Edition, Pearson Education, India, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Webb John W. and Reis Ronald A., ―Programmable Logic Controllers‖, 5th Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi,
2005.
2. Jovitha Jerome, ―Virtual Instrumentation using LabVIEW‖, 1st Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 2010.

CO1 use different measuring instruments and sensors Applying (K3)
CO2 understand the working principle of various transducers for real time applications Understanding
(K2)
CO3 develop programs for virtual systems using LabVIEW Applying (K3)
CO4 design virtual system using the features of LabVIEW Applying (K3)
CO5 build ladder diagram for industrial applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
20ECE11 ELECTRONICS CIRCUIT BOARD DESIGN

Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the different types of Printed Circuit Boards, design concepts, steps to fabricate PCB,
different tools for PCB design and component tracing in assembled PCBs
Unit - I Introduction to PCB designing concepts: 6
Types of Components used in PCB, Terminologies in PCB Designing, Types of PCBs: Single Sided (Single Layer),
Double Layer and Multi-Layer PCB, Flexible PCB, Materials for PCB manufacturing.
Unit - II PCB Design Considerations: 6

PCB Design flow, General, Mechanical and Electrical considerations, Design rules for Analog, Digital and High
frequency circuits. Electromagnetic interference/ Compatibility (EMI/ EMC).
Unit - III Design and Simulation of PCB: 6

Electronic Design Automation (EDA) Tools – Single layer PCB, Two layer PCB. Circuit Design and simulation,
creating footprint, placement and routing, Generating Gerber file for single layer PCB.
Unit - IV PCB Fabrication Techniques: 6

Image transfer techniques. Plating techniques: Immersion, Electro less, Electroplating, Solder Mask, Etching
techniques, Mechanical operations.
Unit - V Circuit Tracing and Testing & Case studies: 6

Soldering techniques, Testing PCB, Environmental concern. Case studies - Power supply, Token Counter, Wien-
bridge Oscillator.
1. Study of CAD for PCB Design (Eagle CAD or Equivalent Open Source Tool)
2. Soldering and de-soldering the components on the PCB including SMD devices
3. Design and Simulation of 230V AC to 5V/9V/12V DC Power Supply in CAD Tool
4. Design, simulating, assembling and soldering of IR Sensor Module
5. Preparation of layout from the circuit design
6. Trouble shooting of single layer and multi-layer PCB
TEXT BOOK:
1. Khandpur R S, Printed Circuit Board: Design,Fabrication, Assembly and Testing, 1st, McGraw Hill Education
Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Mehta S D, Electronic Product Design: Volume 1 – Basics of PCB Design, 1st, S Chand Publications, New
Delhi, 2011.
2. Clyde Coombs, Printed Circuits Handbook, 7th, McGraw Hill Professional, New Delhi, 2016.

CO1 summarize different types of PCBs Understanding
(K2)
CO2 describe the PCB design rules and considerations Understanding
(K2)
CO3 apply the PCB Design rules to design and simulate single layer PCB Applying (K3)
CO4 prepare Gerber file for a single layer PCB for a given circuit Applying (K3)
CO5 realize the steps to examine and trace the assembled electronic components on PCB Understand (K2)
CO6 construct and verify the working of a single layer PCB using simulation software Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO7 carry out steps to fabricate single layer PCB Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8 identify the fault of a given PCB and suggest solutions to rectify the fault Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 1
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 3 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 2 3 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO7 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO8 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 20 45 35 100
CAT3 10 35 55 100
ESE 20 45 35 100
20ECE12 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Digital Signal Processing 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To apply the various Digital Image Processing techniques to process the real time images
Unit - I Digital Image Fundamentals: 9
Elements of digital image processing systems, Elements of visual perception– Brightness– Contrast– Hue–
Saturation– Mach band effect, Image sampling– Quantization, Basic relationship between pixels, Color image
fundamentals – RGB– HSI models, Need for transforms, DFT and its Properties: Separable – Spatial shift –
Periodicity –Scaling – Orthogonality – Rotation, DCT, Haar
Unit - II Image Enhancement and Restoration: 9
Image Enhancement: Basic intensity transformations – Piecewise linear transformation functions, Histogram
equalization, Spatialand Frequency domain filtering: Smoothing and sharpening filters.
Image Restoration: Degradation model – Noise distributions– Median – Geometric mean – Harmonic mean – Contra
harmonic mean filters – Order Statistics filters – Inverse and wiener filtering – Constrained least square filtering.
Unit - III Image Segmentation, Representation and Description: 9
Point, line and edge detection – Basics of intensity thresholding – Region based segmentation : Region growing –
Region splitting and merging, Image representation : Chain codes, – Boundary descriptors – Regional descriptors,
Morphology – dilationand erosion – opening and closing
Unit - IV Image Compression: 9
Fundamentals: Fidelity Criteria – Image Compression Model – Types of redundancy – Huffmann – Run length
coding – Arithmetic coding – Bit–plane coding – Block Transform coding – Lossless and Lossy Predictive coding –
JPEG standard
Unit - V Object Recognition and Application: 9
Patterns and Pattern Class – Recognition based on Decision-Theoretic Methods – Matching – Structural Methods
Applications: LocalNaive Bayes and Nearest Neighbor for Image Classification
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Rafael C Gonzalez & Richard E Woods, "Digital Image Processing", 4 thEdition, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Jayaraman S, Esakkirajan S & Veerakumar T, "Digital Image Processing", 1 stEdition, 22nd Reprint, Tata
2. Anil K Jain, "Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing", 4th Edition, PHI Learning, New Delhi, 1995.

CO1 demonstrate the fundamental concepts and image transforms Applying (K3)
CO2 apply Image enhancement and restoration techniques in both spatial and frequency domain Applying (K3)
to improve the quality of images
CO3 identify the features and region of interest of an image using segmentation, representation Applying (K3)
and description techniques for image classification
CO4 employ image compression algorithms on digital images Applying (K3)
CO5 apply image recognition techniques for real time applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 40 40 100
CAT2 20 20 60 100
CAT3 10 50 40 100
ESE 15 45 40 100
20ECE13 - ASIC DESIGN
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites VLSI Design 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To learn different programmable ASICs, logic cells, I/O cells and interconnects and to perform synthesis
and physical design flow in ASIC design
Unit - I Introduction to ASICs, CMOS Logic, ASIC Library Design, Programmable ASICs: 9
Types of ASICs - Design flow – CMOS transistors- Transistor as resistors - Transistor parasitic capacitance –
Logical effort-Antifuse - Static RAM - EPROM and EEPROM technology
Unit - II Programmable ASICs, logic cells and I/O Cells: 9
Actel ACT - Xilinx LCA - DC & AC inputs and outputs – Clock & power inputs
Unit - III Programmable Interconnects and Logic Synthesis: 9
Actel ACT – Xilinx LCA - Verilog logic synthesis: Delays, Blocking and Non blocking assignment, Combinational
logic, multiplexers, Case statement, decoders, arithmetic and Sequential logic
Unit - IV Partitioning, Floorplanning and Placement: 9
Physical design flow -System partitioning - FPGA partitioning:KL algorithm –Floorplanning –Placement :
Constructive and iterative placement algorithms
Unit - V Routing: 9
Global routing - Detailed routing –Area routing-Maze Algorithm-Channel routing- Left Edge Algorithm-Special routing
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Smith M.J.S, "Application Specific Integrated Circuits", 12th Edition, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi,
2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Wayne Wolf, "FPGA-Based System Design", 1st Edition, PHI, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Erik larson, "Introduction to Advanced System-on-Chip Test Design and Optimization", 1st Edition, Springer,
USA, 2005.

CO1 infer the different types of ASICs design, CMOS characteristics and programming Understanding (K2)
technologies & programmable ASICs
CO2 Elucidate the different programmable ASIC logic cells and I/O cells Understanding (K2)
CO3 infer the different programmable interconnects and synthesis Understanding (K2)
CO4 apply algorithms for partitioning, floor planning and placement Applying (K3)
CO5 perform routing design in an ASIC Applying (K3)

CO1 2 1 2 1 3
CO2 2 1 1 2 2 1 3
CO3 2 1 1 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 80 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 10 20 70 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
20ECE14 NETWORK INFORMATION SECURITY
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Data communication and Networking 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To provide a broad overview on cryptographic algorithms, secure key management and distribution
mechanism implemented in data communication networks..
Unit - I Network Security Concepts: 9
Computer security concepts, the OSI security architecture, Security attacks, services and Mechanisms -Network
security model,Divisibility and the division algorithm, Euclidean Algorithm, Modular arithmetic, Groups, rings, and
fields, finite fields of the form GF(p),Polynomial arithmetic.
Unit - II Number Theory and Classical Encryption Techniques: 9
Prime numbers, Fermat’s and Euler’s theorems - Testing for primality -The Chinese remainder theorem- Discrete
logarithms. Classical Encryption techniques: Symmetric cipher model, substitution techniques, transposition
techniques, Stream and block cipher techniques.
Unit - III Symmetric Key Cryptography and Public Key Cryptography: 9
Data Encryption Standard-Block cipher principles-block cipher modes of operation, Advanced Encryption Standard
(AES). Public key cryptography: Principles of public key cryptosystems-The RSA algorithm- Security of RSA.
Unit - IV Wireless and Email Security: 9
Wireless Security - Mobile Device Security - IEEE 802.11i Wireless LAN Security - Email Threats and
Comprehensive Email Security - S/MIME- Pretty Good Privacy - DNS Security Extensions.
Unit - V IP Security: 9
Overview of IPSec - IP security policy, encapsulating security payload, combining security association, Internet key
exchange, Cryptography suites.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. William Stallings, "Cryptography and Network Security", 7th Edition, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Behrouz A. Ferouzan & Debdeep Mukhopadhyay, "Cryptography and Network Security", 3rd Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, NewDelhi, 2015
2. Charles P. Fleeger, "Security in Computing", 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2015.

CO1 understand OSI security architecture and mathematics of cryptography Understanding (K2)
CO2 understand number theory and classical encryption techniques Applying (K3)
CO3 apply knowledge in symmetric and public key cryptography Applying (K3)
CO4 infer different wireless and email security mechanism Analyze (K4)
CO5 analyze attacks in IP networks Understanding (K2)

CO1 2 1 3 2
CO2 2 1 3 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 2 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 60 20 100
CAT2 20 40 30 10 100
CAT3 20 60 20 100
ESE 20 30 40 10 100
PE: GROUP-III
20ECE15 WIRELESS BROADBAND COMMUNICATION
Programme &
Branch
Mobile Communication, Data Communication
and Networking
Preamble To explore IEEE 802.16- WiMAX broadband wireless communication and its associated techniques.
Unit - I Wireless MAN : 9
Evolution of Broadband Wireless -Spectrum Options for Broadband Wireless-Technical Challenges for Broadband
Wireless- Background on IEEE802.16 and WiMAX- Salient Features of WiMAX
Unit - II Medium Access Control in Wireless MAN: 9

Sub layers of the MAC Layer of IEEE 802.16 – Service Flows and Connection – Frame Structure – Open Issues in
IEEE 802.16- MAC Layer of ETSI HiperACCESS.
Unit - III Radio Resource Management: 9
Mesh Mode Operations – RRM in Tree Topology– RRM in Mesh Topology.
QoS in WiMAX Mesh Networks: Services Provisioning-QoS Framework– QoS Scheduling
Unit - IV Mobility Management: 9
Mobile WiMAX Network - Idle-Mode Management- Anchored Mobility Management- (ASN and CSN).
Energy management : PMP and Mesh Modes in IEEE 802.16 WiMAX- Sleep Mode in the IEEE 802.16e- Energy
Consumption Analysis with Downlink, Uplink Traffic and Generalized Traffic Process.
Unit - V IEEE 802.16j Multi-hop Relay Networks: 9
Overview-Challenges- Tunneling and Aggregation- Resource Scheduling Methods- Dimensioning Cellular Multi-hop
802.16 Networks
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Yan Zhang and Hsiao‑Hwa Chen, "Mobile WiMAX : toward broadband wireless metropolitan area networks",
Auerbach Publications, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1 Jeffrey G. Andrews, Arunabha Ghosh and RiasMuhamed, "Fundamentals of WiMAX: understanding broadband
wireless networking", Pearson Education, 2007.
2. Kwang-Cheng Chen and J. Roberto B. de Marca, “Mobile WiMAX”, John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
3. Uma ShankerJha and Ramjee Prasad, "OFDM Towards Fixed and Mobile Broadband Wireless Access", Artech
House, 2007.

CO1 interpret the functioning of fixed and mobile broadband MAC layer functionalities. Understanding(K2)
CO2 apply suitable QoS framework and resource management of wireless broadband
Applying(K3)
networks.
CO3 Comprehend different energy efficient algorithms suitable for wireless broadband
Understanding(K2)
networks.
CO4 apply the suitable methods in solving mobility related issues. Applying(K3)
CO5 Comprehend technical issues in Cellular Multi-hop 802.16 Networks. Understanding(K2)

CO1 2 1 3 1
CO2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 15 60 25 100
CAT2 15 55 30 100
CAT3 25 50 25 100
ESE 20 60 20 100
20ECE16 - EMBEDDED IOT
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand and apply the basic concept of IoT Systems for real time applications
Unit - I Introduction to M2M and IoT: 9
Introduction–M2M communication–IoT (Internet of Things)–Implications for IoT–IoT value chains– Real-World
Design Constraints–An emerging industrial structure for IoT–M2M and IoT analytics: Introduction–Analytics
architecture.
Unit - II IoT Architecture and Use Case: 9
IoT Reference Model: IoT domain model– Information model–Functional model–communication model–Safety,
Privacy, Trust, Security model Implementation Examples: The Smart Grid–Industrial Automation.
Unit - III Introduction to Raspberry pi and Python Programming: 9
Raspberry Pi: History of the Raspberry Pi - Installing the Raspbian OS and Overview of OS -Python Programming:
Python tools for Raspberry Pi -Using the Python command line - Writing a simple Python program - Creating the
class - Creating the object - Using the object inspector - Testing your class - Making the code flexible - Reading the
state of a button
Unit - IV Web Services and Raspberry Pi as Web Server: 9
Subscribing to Web Services: Amazon Web Services IoT - IBM Watson platform - Google Cloud platform - Microsoft
Azure - Weather Underground - A basic Python program to pull data from the cloud. Raspberry Pi as Web Server:
Introducing CherryPy - a minimalist Python web framework - Creating a simple web page using CherryPy
Unit - V Case studies: 9
Reading the state from an infrared motion sensor - Modifying Hello LED using infrared sensor. IoT Projects
Preparation: Using the DHT11 to find temperature and humidity- Using the Pi camera to take a photo - Creating and
Displaying data on dashboard using CherryPy
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jan Holler, "From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things Introduction to a New Age of
I, II
Intelligence", 1st Edition, Academic Press - Elsevier, Waltham, USA, 2014.
2. Colin Dow, "Internet of things Programming Projects", 1st Edition, PACKT publishing,
III, IV, V
Birmingham, UK, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. https://www.raspberrypi.org/documentation/
2. https://docs.python.org/3/

CO1 describe the basic concepts of M2M and IoT Understanding (K2)
CO2 distinguish different IoT Architectures for automation Understanding (K2)
CO3 apply python programming knowledge for IoT application developments Applying (K3)
CO4 manipulate software and hardware of single board computer for web interface Applying (K3)
CO5 develop IoT based projects for real time applications using single board computer Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 10 60 30 100
20ECE17 - DSP PROCESSOR AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Programme &
ECE Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Digital Signal Processing 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To understand the internal modules of the DSP processor and to implement real time applications
Unit - I Introduction to Real-Time Digital Signal Processing: 9
Interface- DSP Hardware-DSP system Design- Multiplier and Multiplier accumulator (MAC) – Modified Bus
Structures and Memory access in Programmable DSPs – Multiple access memory – Multi-port memory – VLIW
architecture- Pipelining – Special Addressing modes in P-DSPs – On chip Peripherals
Unit - II Introduction to TMS320C67xx Digital Signal Processor: 9
Fundamentals of Programmable DSPs - Architecture of TMS320C67XX - Buses- Computational Units- -On-chip
peripherals-Timers and Interrupts
Unit - III TMS320C67xx Programming: 9
Pipeline operation - Address Generation Units-Memory organization- Memory architecture -Addressing modes and
instruction set-assembly language instructions
Unit - IV DSP Interfacing 9
Interfacing with serial I/O, A/D,D/A converters, parallel interfacing, interfacing with RAM,EEPROMS, DSP Tools :
Assembler, Debugger, C compiler, Linker and Loader, Programming Examples Using C Code with CCS
Unit - V Applications Using TMS320C67XX: 9
FIR Filter applications-Adaptive filter Applications-Image Processing Applications- ( all applications using Simulink
Blocksets)
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Venkataramani B. and Bhaskar M., “Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming and Applications”, 2 nd
Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Texas Instrumentation, “User guides: Analog Devices”, Motorola Inc, Arizona, 2003.
2. Sen M. Kuo, Bob H. Lee and Wenshun Tian, “Real-Time Digital Signal Processing: Implementations and
Applications”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd.,2006

CO1 infer the basic concepts of real time DSP processor Understanding
(K2)
CO2 summarize the architectural concepts of C67xx processor Understanding
(K2)
CO3 apply programming concepts to develop simple and real time applications using C67xx Applying (K3)
processor
CO4 understand the peripheral interfacing with DSP processor Understanding
(K2)
CO5 Implement the filtering operations on signals and images using DSP processors Applying (K3)

CO1 2 1 1 1 3
CO2 2 1 2 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 1
CO4 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 30 50 20 100
CAT3 20 60 20 100
ESE 25 55 20 100
20ECE18 WAVELET TRANSFORM AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Linear Algebra and Transforms 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To learn and apply the various Wavelet Transform techniques on real time signals and images.
Unit - I Wavelet Fundamentals: 9
Vector spaces – Relationship between functions, Sequences, Vectors – Properties – Fourier transform and non-
stationary signals – Limitations – Review of sampling theorem.
Unit - II Haar Wavelet: 9

Analysis of Haar wavelet in function of scale and time – Haar multirate solution Analysis: Analysis part and
Synthesis part – Frequency domain analysis of Haar filter bank. Daubechies Family: Calculation of scaling function –
Daub-4 and Daub–6 design details.
Unit - III Continuous Wavelet Transform: 9

The uncertainty principle – Time-bandwidth product – Time-Frequency tiling – STFT and wavelets – CWT-
Comparison of STFT and CWT – Interpretation of spectrogram plot – Reconstruction and Admissibility –
Discreitization of scale.
Unit - IV Discrete Wavelet Transform: 9

Dyadic MRA – Theorem – Inverse DWT computation – Bi-orthogonal and orthogonal filter banks – Construction of
Orthogonal filterbank – Variants of MRA: Splines and Wavelet packets. Other Wavelet Families: Mortlet, Mexican
Hat, and Gabor – Multi-dimensional wavelets: 2-D Haar wavelet transform.
Unit - V Applications: 9
Compression – Denoising – Analysis of biomedical signals and images using wavelets
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Soman K.P. and Ramachandran K.I., “Insight into Wavelets - From Theory to Practice”, Prentice Hall of India,
2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Rao R.M. and Bopardikar A.S., “Wavelet Transforms: Introduction to Theory and Applications”, Addison
Wesley, Reprint, 2012.
2. Mallat S., “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing: The Sparse Way”, 3rd Edition, Academic Press, 2009.
3. Vikram M Gadre and Aditya S Abhyankar, “Multiresolution and Multirate Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill
Education, 1st edition,2017.

CO1 illustrate the fundamentals of vectors spaces and properties Understanding(K2)
CO2 apply haar wavelet and daubechies wavelet on discrete samples Applying (K3)
CO3 utilize continuous wavelet transform for the interpretation of spectrum plots and its Applying (K3)
reconstruction
CO4 experiment with discrete wavelet transform of orthogonal filter banks Applying (K3)
CO5 Demonstrate the application of different wavelets on biomedical signals and images Understanding(K2)

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 1 2 2 2 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 20 30 50 100
CAT3 20 50 30 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
20ECE19–TESTING AND FAULT DIAGNOSIS OF VLSI CIRCUITS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the process of test generation, DFT architecture and fault diagnosis
Unit - I Fault Modeling and Simulation: 9
Defect, errors and faults- Functional versus structural testing-Levels of fault models- Single stuck at fault-Modeling
circuits for simulation- Algorithms for true-value simulation- Algorithms for fault simulation- Statistical methods for
fault simulation
Unit - II Test Generation of Combinational Circuits: 9
Algorithms and representation- Redundancy identification- Testing as a global problem-Combinational ATPG
algorithm-D-algorithm-PODEM-FAN-Test generation Systems-Test compaction.
Unit - III Test Generation of Sequential Circuits: 9
ATPG for single clock synchronous circuits- Time-Frame expansion method-Simulation based sequential circuit
Unit - IV Design for Testability: 9
Testability –AdHoc design for testability techniques- Controllability and observability by means of scan registers-
Generic scan based design- Classical scan designs- Board level and system level DFT approaches-Boundary scan
standards
Unit - V Logic level Diagnosis: 9

Basic concepts- Fault dictionary- Guided probe testing- Diagnosis by UUT reduction-Fault diagnosis for
combinational circuits- Expert systems for diagnosis - Effect cause analysis- Diagnostic reasoning based on
structure and behavior
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Bushnell M.L. and Agrawal V.D., “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital, Memory and Mixed- Signal VLSI
Circuits”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2nd Printing, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Abramovici, M., Breuer, M.A and Friedman, A.D., “Digital Systems and Testable Design”, Jaico Publishing
House, 13th Impression, 2012.
2. Laung – Terng wang, Cheng – wen wu, Xidogingwen, “VLSI Testing Principles and Architectures: Design for
Testability”, Morgan Kaufmann Publisher,2nd Reprint, 2013.

CO1 interpret the different types of fault models Understanding
(K2)
CO2 generate test patterns to detect the fault in combinational circuits Applying (K3)
CO3 generate test patterns to detect the fault in sequential circuits Applying (K3)
CO4 design a circuit for testability Applying (K3)
CO5 infer the different measures of system diagnosability Understanding
(K2)

CO1 3 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 2 1 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 60 30 100
ESE 10 60 30 100
20ECE20 - COMPUTER VISION
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To learn intelligent algorithms which can perform/mimic the task of human visual perception.
Unit - I Image Formation and Transformations: 9
Image Formation – Sampling and Representation - Types of Images: Binary, Gray and Colour - Neighbourhood
Processing – Transformations: Shifting, Rotations and Scaling – Image filtering in time-domain.
Unit - II Feature Detection: 9

Properties: Scale and Rotation Invariance – Affine Invariance – DoG Descriptors – Feature Descriptors: Haris
Corner - ANMS – SIFT, Feature Matching Strategy and error rates.
Unit - III Segmentation: 9
Active Contours: Snakes – Dynamic Snakes – Level Sets, Area: Watershed – Graph Cuts- K-means Clustering
Unit - IV Object Classification: 9
Linear classification – Curse of Dimensionality - Support vector machine – Loss functions – Optimization – Non-
linearly separable cases – Regularization
Unit - V Case Study: 9
Face Recognition:Eigen faces – Artificial Neural Networks – Activation functions – Back Propagation –
Convolutional Neural Networks – Architectures
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Richard Szeliski, "Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications", 2nd Edition, Springer, NewYork, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. M Mohri, A Rostamizadeh & A Talwalkar, "Foundations of Machine Learning", 2nd Edition, MIT Press, USA,
2018.
2. Stanford Lecture Notes at https://cs231n.github.io/convolutional-networks/

CO1 apply the various spatial transformations on the image Applying (K3)
CO2 extract various feature detector and matching techniques Applying (K3)
CO3 make use of various established segmentation algorithms for a specific task Applying (K3)
CO4 apply linear classification algorithms for image classification and recognition Applying (K3)
CO5 use artificial neural networks and deep convolutional neural networks for face recognition Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 2 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 15 55 30 100
ESE 10 60 30 100
20ECE21 MEMS DESIGN
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course equips the students to understand the concepts of standard MEMS and apply the
knowledge of micro fabrication techniques for the design and manufacturing of a MEMS device or a
micro system.
Unit - I Materials for MEMS and Scaling Laws 9
Microsystems and microelectronics - Working principle– Si substrate - Silicon compounds - Gallium arsenide -
Quartz-piezoelectric crystals. Scaling laws - Scaling in geometry - Scaling in electrostatic forces - Scaling in
electromagnetic forces - Scaling in electricity - Scaling in heat transfer.
Unit - II Micro Actuators and Micro Sensors 9
Micro actuation techniques- Micro actuators – Micro sensors - Micro motors – Micro pump -Micro valves – Micro
grippers – Micro accelerometer – Principles, Design rules ,modeling and simulation, Verification and testing.
Unit - III Basic Mechanics for Micro System Design 9
Static bending of thin plates - Mechanical vibration - Thermo mechanics - Thermal stresses - Fracture mechanics -
Stress intensity factors, fracture toughness and interfacial fracture mechanics.
Unit - IV Fabrication Process and Micromachining 9
Single crystal silicon wafer formation - Photolithography - Ion implantation - Diffusion – Oxidation – CVD - Physical
vapor deposition - Epitaxial growth - Etching - Bulk Micro manufacturing - Surface micro machining – LIGA –SLIGA.
Unit - V Micro System Design, Packaging and Applications 9
Micro System Design considerations - Process design - Mechanical design – Mask layout design - Micro system
packaging – Die level - Device level - System level – Packaging techniques - Die preparation - Surface bonding -
Wire bonding – Sealing - Applications of micro system in Automotive - Aero space – Telecommunications. RF
MEMS
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Tai-Ran Hsu, MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture, 2 nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak. The MEMS Hand book, 2nd Edition, CRC press, 2006
2. M.-H. Bao. Micromechanical Transducers: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, and gyroscopes, 1st Edition,
Elsevier, New York, 2004

CO1 acquire knowledge of MEMS concepts and Scaling laws Understanding(K2
CO2 understand the principles of Micro Sensors and Actuators Applying(K3)
CO3 gain knowledge about mechanics Understanding(K2)
CO4 know the micro fabrication and micro manufacturing techniques Applying(K3)
CO5 apply the knowledge to design a micro system. Applying(K3)

CO1 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 56.67 23.33 100
CAT2 20 56.67 23.33 100
CAT3 16.67 16.67 66.67 100
ESE 16.67 27.78 55.56 100
PE: GROUP-IV
20ECE22 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Analog and Digital Communication 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To understand the basic terminologies related to satellites, various sub systems, multiple access
techniques and applications of a satellite.
Unit - I Overview of Satellite Systems: 9
Introduction – Frequency allocations for satellite services – Kepler‘s law – Definitions of terms for earth orbiting
satellites –Orbital elements – Apogee and Perigee heights – Orbital perturbations – Effects of a non spherical earth
– Atmospheric drag – Inclined orbits – Calendars – The Orbital plane – The Geocentric equatorial coordinate system
– Earth station referred to the IJK frame – The topocentric horizon coordinate system - The sub satellite point.
Unit - II Geostationary Orbit and Space Segment: 9
Antenna look angles – Limits of visibility - Earth eclipse of satellite – Sun transit outage – Launching orbits – Attitude
control – Station keeping - telemetry, tracking and command sub system - Transponders – Wide band amplifier –
Input demultiplexer –Power amplifier.
Unit - III Earth Segment &Space Link: 9
Earth Segment : Introduction – Receive only home TV systems – Outdoor unit -Indoor unit for analog (FM) TV –
MATV system –CATV system – Transmit receive earth stations
Space Link:Equivalent isotropic radiated power – Transmission losses -Link power budget equation – Carrier to
noise ratio – Uplink C/N–Downlink C/N –Effects of rain
Unit - IV Satellite Access: 9
Single access – Preassigned FDMA- Demand assigned FDMA- SPADE system TDMA: Reference burst - Preamble
and Postamble- Carrier recovery- Network synchronization-Unique word detection- Traffic data- Frame efficiency
and channel capacity- preassigned TDMA- Demand assigned TDMA - Code division multiple access – Space
division multiple access.
Unit - V Applications : 9
INMARSAT : VSAT Systems: Network architectures, Access control, Multiple access selection, Overview of
Radarsat and GEOSAT- Study of recently launched GEOSAT and its applications.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Roddy Dennis,Satellite Communications, 4th Edition, Mc-Graw Hill, New York, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Varsha Agrawal and Anil K.Maini, Satellite Communications, 1st Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,
2010.
2. Pratt Timothy, Bostian Charles and Allnutt Jeremy, Satellite Communications, 2 nd Edition, Wiley India Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2006.

CO1 recite the various terminologies in satellite communication problems Remembering
(K1)
CO2 recognize the working of various sub systems of a satellite Understanding
(K2)
CO3 make use of terminal stations to broadcast the programmes through satellite earth stations Applying (K3)
and understand the effect of losses
CO4 comprehend different access methodologies of satellite communication Applying (K3)
CO5 illustrate the different types of satellite based on applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 20 55 25 100
CAT3 15 60 25 100
ESE 20 55 25 100
20ECE23 WIRELESS NETWORKS
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Data Communication and Networking 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To acquire broad overview onvarious wireless standards, technologies and functionalities of TCP / IP
suite in wireless systems.
Unit - I Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) 9
Introduction to 802.11, Emerging IEEE 802.11 Standards, Wireless LAN Topologies, Establishing a Wireless
Connection, Physical Layer, Packet Structure and Packet Types
Unit - II WLAN QoS: 9
Channel Access, Admission Control, Power Management, QoS in Wireless Mesh Networks
Unit - III WLAN MAC: 9
IEEE 802.11 MAC Protocol, MAC Enhancements for QoS Support, Performance understanding of IEEE 802.11e
EDCA, IEEE 802.11n Standard.
Unit - IV High Speed WLAN: 9
Introduction to 802.11ac, Core Technology of 802.11 ac, Radio Channels in 802.11ac, Transmission: Modulation,
Coding, and Guard Interval. PHY-Level Framing, Transmission and Reception Process, 802.11ac Data Rates.
Unit - V IEEE 80211.ac (MAC): 9
Framing, medium access procedures, Beamforming Basics, Single-User (SU) Beamforming, Multi-User (MU)
Beamforming, Building an 802.11ac Network.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Benny Bing, “Emerging Technologies in Wireless LANs Theory, Design, and Deployment”, 1 st Edition,
I,II,III
Cambridge University Press, 2008.
2. Matthew S. Gast “802.11ac: A Survival Guide”, 1st Edition, O’Reilly, 2013. IV,V
REFERENCES:
1. Gary. S. Rogers and John Edwards, “An Introduction to Wireless Technology”, 2 nd Edition, Pearson Education,
2007.
2. Clint Smith P.E. and Daniel Collins, “3G Wireless Networks”, 2 nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2007.

CO1 perceive various wireless standards and technologies Remembering(K1)
CO2 comprehend the functionalities of QoS in WLAN systems Understanding
(K2)
CO3 apply the MAC layer techniques to improve WLAN throughput performance Applying (K3)
CO4 Comprehend various high throughput wireless technologies Understanding
(K2)
CO5 Analyse different concepts in IEEE 80211.ac MAC layer Analysing (K4)

CO1 1 - - - - 3 1 1 -
CO2 3 2 1 - - 2 1 3 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 - 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 - - 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 25 75 100
CAT2 20 60 20 100
CAT3 10 45 25 20 100
ESE 10 50 25 15 100
20ECE24 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the concepts of real time operating systems for embedded applications development
Unit - I Introduction to RTOS: 9
Basic definitions – Foreground/Background systems – Shared resources – Multitasking – Tasks – Priority inversion
problem – Context switches – Kernels – Scheduling approaches – FIFO – Non-preemptive and preemptive kernels –
Round-Robin scheduling – Rate monotonic scheduling – Mutual exclusion – Deadlock – Synchronization – Event
flags – Interrupts – Clock ticks – Advantages and disadvantages of real time kernels.
Unit - II Task Management: 9

Tasks –Task states – TCB – Task scheduling – Locking and unlocking the schedulers – Idle task – Statistics task -
Creating tasks – Task stacks – Stack checking – Deleting – Changing a task‘s priority – Suspending task –
Resuming task – Task query.
Unit - III Time Management and Event Control Blocks: 9

Delaying a task – Resuming a delayed task – System time. Event Control Blocks: Placing a task in the ECB wait List
– Removing a task from an ECB wait list – Finding the highest priority task – List of free ECBs – Initialize – Task
ready, wait and time out of an event
Unit - IV Inter-task Communication Management: 9

Semaphore Management: Creating – Deleting – Waiting – Signaling - Non-Blocking and Query, Message Mailbox
Management: Creating – Deleting – Waiting - Sending and getting a message - Query and using a mailbox as a
binary semaphore, Message Queue Management: Creating – Deleting – Waiting - Sending (FIFO and LIFO) and
getting a message – Flushing – Query - Using a queue when reading analog inputs and using a queue as a counting
semaphore
Unit - V Memory Management: 9

Memory control blocks - Creating partition - Obtaining a memory block - Returning a memory block – Query -
Memory partition and waiting for memory blocks from a partition. Case study: Design of Embedded Systems using
μC/OS-II: Automatic Chocolate Vending Machine and Digital Camera
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jean J. Labrosse, "MicroC/OS – II The Real Time Kernel", 2nd Edition, CMP Books, UK, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Rajkamal, "Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design", 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2014.
2. Gabriela Nicolescu, Pieter J. Mosterman, "Model-Based Design for Embedded Systems ", 1st Edition, CRC
Press, UK, 2017.

CO1 comprehend the fundamental concepts and scheduling algorithms for real time applications Understanding
(K2)
CO2 illustrate the characteristics of task management Understanding
(K2)
CO3 elucidate the working of time and event management of tasks. Understanding
(K2)
CO4 employ the principles of Inter-task communication services in operating systems Applying (K3)
CO5 design real time embedded systems using the concepts of RTOS Applying (K3)

CO1 2 1 3 1
CO2 2 1 3 1
CO3 3 1 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 5 35 60 100
ESE 15 50 35 100
20ECE25 DEEP LEARNING AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Programme &
Branch
Linear Algebra and Transforms, Probability and
Stochastic process
Preamble To learn the foundations of deep learning algorithms from a simple perceptron to complex models used
for image and text processing
Unit - I Neurons : 9
MP Neuron – Perceptron – Perceptron Learning Algorithm – Convergence – Multi Layer perceptron –
Representational power – Sigmoid neuron –Application to prediction
Unit - II ANN and Back propagation: 9
Gradient Descent- Feed forward neural networks - Representational power - Back propagation with respect to :
Loss, Intermediate nodes, Input - Application to binary classification
Unit - III Optimization : 9
Introduction to Optimization – Convex Optimization - Drawback of Gradient Descent – Momentum based GD -
Nesterov Accelerated GD – Stochastic GD- mini batch GD-learning rate schedulers.
Unit - IV Regularization: 9
Vanishing and exploding gradients-Activation functions (tanh, relu ,leaky relu)-bias-variance tradeoff – L2-
Regulariztion- Batch Normalization –Dropout- Initialization Strategies.
Unit - V Advanced Architectures: 9
CNN-Basic of Convolution – Cross entropy loss – Architectures: LeNet - AlexNet .Resnet, RNN: BPTT – LSTM -
GRU–Transformers. Applications to vision and speech.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Ian Goodfellow, “Deep Learning”, 1st Edition, MIT Press, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Raul Rojas, “Neural Networks : A systemetic Introduction”, 1 st Edition , Springer,1996
2. http://neuralnetworksanddeeplearning.com/

CO1 use multilayer Perceptron and its learning algorithm for linearly non-separable problems. Applying (K3)
CO2 Apply the back propagation algorithms to learn the parameters of feed forward neural Applying(K3)
networks.
CO3 use various optimization algorithms to update model parameters. Applying (K3)
CO4 apply regularization and different hyper parameter tuning strategies to improve the Applying (K3)
performance of the models
CO5 make use of CNN and RNN architectures to speech and vision related application. Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 3
CO2 3 2 1 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 6 60 34 100
CAT2 6 60 34 100
CAT3 14 70 16 100
ESE 10 60 30 100
20ECE26 - SYSTEM VERILOG
Programme &
B.E& ECE Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble To understand verification of IP & sub-system that demands constrained random verification.
Unit - I Verification Guidelines 9
Introduction, The Verification Process, The Verification Plan, The Verification Methodology, Manual, Basic
Testbench Functionality, Directed Testing, Methodology Basics, Constrained-Random Stimulus, Functional
Coverage, Testbench Components, Layered Testbench, Building a Layered Testbench, Simulation Environment
Phases, Maximum Code Reuse, Testbench Performance.
Unit - II Data Types 9
Introduction to data types, Built-in Data Types, Fixed-Size Arrays, Dynamic Arrays, Queues, Associative Arrays,
Linked Lists, Array Methods, Choosing a Storage Type, Creating New Types with typedef, Creating User-Defined
Structures, Enumerated Types, Constants, Strings, Expression Width, Net Types.Array manipulation methods, Array
querying functions, Queue.
Unit - III Procedural Statements and Routines 9
Introduction, Procedural Statements, Tasks, Functions, and Void Functions, Task and Function Overview,Routine
Arguments, Returning from a Routine, Local Data Storage, Time Values. Process and process control.
Unit - IV Basic OOPs 9
Introduction, Think of Nouns, not Verbs, Your First Class, Where to Define a Class, OOP Terminology,Creating New
Objects, Object Deallocation, Using Objects, Static Variables vs. Global Variables, ClassRoutines, Defining Routines
Outside of the Class, Scoping Rules, Using One Class Inside Another,Understanding Dynamic Objects, Copying
Objects, Public vs. Private Straying Off Course, Building aTestbench.
Unit - V Connecting the Test bench and Design 9
Introduction, Separating the Testbench and Design, The Interface Construct, virtual interface, Stimulus Timing,
Interface Driving and Sampling, Connecting It All Together, Top-Level Scope, Program – Module Interactions,
SystemVerilog Assertions, Call back. The Four-Port ATM Router. Modport and Clocking block. Mailbox.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Chris Spear, “SystemVerilog for Verification: A Guide to Learning the Test bench Language Features”, 2nd
Edition, Springer,USA, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Stuart Sutherland, Simon Davidmann, “System Verilogfor design: a guide to using System Verilogfor hardware
design andmodeling. Springer, 2004.
2. Palnitkar Samir, "Verilog HDL: Guide to Digital Design and synthesis", 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New
Delhi, 2017.

CO1 Elaborate a scenario for verification of a DUT in System Verilog. Understanding
(K2)
CO2 understand different kinds of datatypes used in system Verilog Understanding
(K2)
CO3 distinguish between HDL andHVL Understanding
(K2)
CO4 design test bench to verify the functionality of a design Applying (K3)
CO5 understand the concept of randomization and its importance in verification coverage in a Understanding
complex design (K2)

CO1 2 2 3 3 1 2 1 1 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 1 3 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
20ECE27 - NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Linear algebra and transforms 7 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To model the computer to perform useful tasks involving human language, task like conversational
agent, dialogue system, machine translation, question and answering
Unit - I Computer Language Processing and Regular Expressions: 9
Knowledge in Speech and Language Processing, Ambiguity, Models and Algorithms, Turing Test, Basic Regular
Expression Patterns, Disjunction, Grouping, and Precedence, Example: Simple and Complex, Advanced Operators
Unit - II Text Tokenization and Normalization: 9

Words, Corpora, Word tokenization and normalization, Word segmentation, Sentence segmentation, Minimum edit
distance algorithm
Unit - III Language Modelling: 9

N-Grams, Evaluating Language Modelling, Smoothing algorithm
Unit - IV Logistic Regression as Language Model: 9

Training the Naïve Bayes, Optimizing for sentimental analysis, Naïve Bayes as language modelling, Evaluation of
model.
Unit - V Neural Language Models: 9

Words and Vectors, Cosine Similarity, TF-IDF weighting terms in vector, Application of the TF-IDF vector model
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Jurafsky, Daniel Martin & James H, "Speech and Language Processing - An Introduction to Natural Language
Processing, Computational Linguistics, and Speech Recognition", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education India, New
Delhi, 2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Eisenstein & Jacob, "Natural Language Processing", 1st Edition, MIT Press, USA, 2019.
2. PalashGoyal, Sumit Pandey & Karan Jain, "Deep Learning for Natural Language Processing: Creating Neural
Networks with python", 1st Edition, Apress Media, New York, 2018.

CO1 understand the concept of speech and language processing for intelligent agent Understanding
(K2)
CO2 understand the pattern of regular expressions to search in texts Understanding
(K2)
CO3 apply the text pre-processing technique using NLTK library Applying (K3)
CO4 assign probability to predict word from preceding words using sklearn library Applying (K3)
CO5 apply text categorization task of sentimental analysis using generative classifier using Applying (K3)
sklearn library

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 10 40 50 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
20ECE28 INDUSTRY 4.0
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course provides an overview and fundamentals of industry 4.0 -IIoT revolutions, technology and its
business use case.
Unit - I Overview of Industry 4.0 and Industrial Internet of Things 9
Introduction - Industry 4.0 – IIoT (Industrial Internet of Things). Industry 4.0: Introduction - Design requirements and
Drivers of Industry 4.0 - Sustainability Assessment of industries - Smart Business Perspective – Cyber security -
Impacts of Industry 4.0.
Unit - II IIoT and Reference Architecture: 9
IIoT and Industry 4.0 – IIC - Industrial Internet Systems - Industrial Sensing -Industrial Processes. Business models:
Introduction – Definition – Business models of IoT and IIoT – Reference architecture of IoT and IIoT -IIRA -Key
Performance indicators and Occupational safety and health.
Unit - III Off-Site and On-Site Key Technologies 9
Oﬀ-site Technologies:Introduction - Cloud Computing – Fog Computing. On-site Technologies:Introduction -
Augmented Reality - Virtual Reality - Big Data and Advanced Analytics - Smart factories - Lean manufacturing
system.
Unit - IV Industrial Data Acquisition Systems and Technologies 9
Sensors: Introduction – characteristics – Categories. Actuators: Thermal, Hydraulic,
Pneumatic,ElectromechanicalActuators. Industrial Data Transmission: Fieldbus – Profibus –HART – Modbus – CAN
– DeviceNet – LoRA – NB-IoT - Distributed Control System – PLC - SCADA.
Unit - V IIoT Analytics and Case Study 9
Necessity of analytics -Categorization of analytics – Usefulness and Challenges of Analytics - Mapping and
Deployment of analytics -Artiﬁcial intelligence- Applications of analytics across value chain -Plant Security. Case
Study: Inventory Management and Quality Control - Manufacturing Industry
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Sudip Misra, Chandana Roy, Anandarup Mukherjee, “Introduction toIndustrial Internetof Tings andIndustry 4.0”,
CRC Press, USA, 1st edition, 2021.
REFERENCES:
1. Alasdair Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things” APress; 1st ed. Edition (28 June 2016).
2. Alp Ustundag, Emre Cevikcan, “Industry 4.0: Managing the Digital Transformation, Springer International
Publishing AG; 1st ed. 2018.

CO1 summaries the concepts and business opportunities of Industry 4.0 Understanding (K2)
CO2 explain the role IoT and IIoT architecture for Industry 4.0 Understanding (K2)
CO3 differentiate applications of various recent technologies in the implementation of Industry
Understanding (K2)
4.0
CO4 determine the applications of sensors, actuator and modern embedded bus technologies Applying (K3)
CO5 examine the importance of IIoT analytics for various use cases Applying (K3)

CO1 2 1 1 1 2
CO2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
CO5 2 3 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 30 70 100
CAT3 10 50 40 100
ESE 10 60 30 100
PE: GROUP-V
20ECE29 - NEXT GENERATION WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Programme &
Branch
Preamble To acquire technological insight into 5G network and its associated technologies
Unit - I Introduction to 5G: 9
Mobile communication generation from 1G to 4G, 5G requirements, 5G architecture – NFV, SDN, RAN, Functional
architecture and 5G flexibility, 5G frequency bands
Unit - II Use cases of 5G: 9
Machine Type Communications: fundamental techniques, URLLC-MTC, D2D communications: Radio Resource
Management, Millimeter wave communication – hardware technologies
Unit - III 5G Radio Access Technology: 9
Multicarrier with filtering: FBMC, NOMA, Radio access for dense deployments, Radio access for V2X
communication, Radio access for massive machine-type communication
Unit - IV : Spectrum and Channel Models: 9
Spectrum access modes and sharing scenarios, 5G spectrum technologies, Channel modeling requirements and
scenarios, The METIS channel models
Unit - V Antenna Techniques: 9
Massive MIMO : Single user MIMO , Multi user MIMO , Pilot design for massive MIMO - pilot-data trade-off and
impact of CSI, Techniques to mitigate pilot contamination ,Resource allocation and transceiver algorithms for
massive MIMO, Introduction to beamforming
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Afif Osseiran, Jose F.Monserrat, Patrick Marsch, “5G Mobile and Wireless Communications Technology”, 1 st
Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Jonathan Rodriguez, “Fundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks”, 1stEdition,John Wiley & Sons, 2015.
2. Patrick Marsch, Omer Bulakçı, Olav Queseth and Mauro Boldi, “5G System Design-Architectural and
Functional Considerations and Long Term Research”, 1stEdition,John Wiley & Sons, 2018.

CO1 Interpret the concepts of 5G networks. Understanding (K2)
CO2 Infer the use cases and requirements for 5G Understanding (K2)
CO3 Comprehend the radio access technologies used in 5G Understanding (K2)
CO4 Apply the spectrum optimization algorithms for 5G based CRN Applying (K3)
CO5 Comprehend massive MIMO implementation in 5G networks. Understanding (K2)

CO1 2 1 3 1
CO2 2 1 3
CO3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 15 60 25 100
CAT2 15 55 30 100
CAT3 25 65 10 100
ESE 15 50 25 10 100
20ECE30 CYBER-PHYSICAL SYSTEMS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To explore the logical foundations of Cyber-Physical Systems organized along the dimensions like
modeling, control and computational thinking.
Cyber-Physical System (CPS)-structure of a cyber-physical system-Stanford testbed of autonomous rotorcraft for
multi agent control (STARMAC)-The Design Process-Modelling, Design and Analysis-Applications: Heart surgery,
fly-by-wire aircraft, Traffic control
Unit - II Modeling Dynamic Behaviors: 9
Continuous Dynamics-Newtonian Mechanics- Actor Models- Properties of Systems- Feedback Control. Discrete
Systems- Finite-State Machines- Extended State Machines- Non-determinism- Behaviors and Traces-Hybrid
Systems- Modal Models- Classes of Hybrid Systems.
Composition of State Machines- Concurrent Composition- Hierarchical State Machines, Concurrent Models of
Computation: Structure of Models- Synchronous-Reactive Models- Dataflow Models of Computation- Timed Models
of Computation
Unit - III Security of Cyber-Physical Systems: 9
Cyber Security Requirements- Defining Security and Privacy -Attack Model -Countermeasures -System Theoretic
Approaches- Examples of Security and Privacy in Action- Approaches to Secure Cyber-Physical Systems- Ongoing
Security and Privacy Challenges for CPSs
Unit - IV Synchronization in Distributed Cyber-Physical Systems 9
- Formal Software Engineering- Distributed Consensus Algorithms- Synchronous Lockstep Executions- Time-
Triggered Architecture- Related Technology- Physically Asynchronous-Logically Synchronous Systems.
Unit - V Real-Time Scheduling for Cyber-Physical Systems 9
Scheduling with Fixed Timing Parameters- Memory Effects, Multiprocessor/ Multicore Scheduling- Accommodating
Variability and Uncertainty- Managing Other Resources- Rhythmic Tasks Scheduling.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. E. A. Lee and S. A. Seshia “Introduction to Embedded Systems - A Cyber-Physical Systems I, II

Approach”, The MIT Press,2nd Edition, Feb, 2017.
2 Raj Rajkumar, Dionisio de Niz , Mark Klein “Cyber-Physical Systems” , Pearson Education, Inc, 1st III, IV, V
Edition,2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Glenn A. Fink, Sabina Jeschke, Houbing Song “Security and Privacy in Cyber-Physical Systems Foundations,
Principles, and Applications”, ,JohnWiley & Sons Ltd, 1 st Edition ,2018.

CO1 explain the design constraints of Cyber-Physical Systems (CPS). Understanding (K2)
CO2 employ the functional behavior of CPS based on standard modeling Applying (K3)
CO3 interpret the security requirements and challenges in CPS Understanding (K2)
CO4 choose CPS requirements based on operating system and hardware architecture
Applying (K3)
constraints
CO5 apply the correctness of CPS implementations against system requirements and timing
Applying (K3)
constraints.

CO1 3 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 1 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 60 30 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
20ECE31 - AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To learn the concepts of automotive systems and apply the various novel methods to develop electronic
based automobile devices for all vehicle conditions
Evolution of electronics in automobiles – Risk assessment and reduction - Introduction to Euro Emission standards (I
to VI) – Equivalent Bharat Standards. Working principle and characteristics of sensors: Airflow rate, Engine
crankshaft angular position, Hall effect, Throttle angle, temperature, Knock Sensor – Manifold Pressure Sensors –
EGR sensor. Working principle and characteristics of Actuators: Solenoid Actuators –EGR actuators, stepper motor
actuator and vacuum operated actuator - Emission testing – Exhaust gas measurement – Exhaust Analyzer -
Emission limits.
Unit - II Charging and Starting systems: 9

Charging system: Requirements of the charging system – Principles – Alternators - Smart Charging. Staring system:
Requirements of starting system – Starter motors and circuits – Types of Starter motors.
Unit - III Ignition and Injection Systems: 9

Ignition systems: Ignition fundamentals – Electronic ignition systems – Electronic Spark Ignition – Distribution less
Ignition - Coil on plug (COP) ignition - Spark Plugs. Electronic fuel Control – Combustion – Engine fuelling and
exhaust emissions – Electronic control of carburetion – Fuel Injection – Petrol fuel injection – Diesel fuel injection.
Unit - IV Engine and Emission Control Systems: 9

Engine and Emission Control Systems: Control modes for Ignition and fuel control – Engine management system.
Catalytic converter – EGR – SCR – DeNox Trap. Diagnostics systems in modern automobiles. In vehicle networks:
CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY, MOST.
Unit - V Chassis, Comfort and Safety Systems: 9

Antilock braking system - Traction and Stability Control – Active Suspension – Electronic control of automatic
transmission – Cruise control – Adaptive cruise control – Airbag and Seat belt tensioners. Centralized door locking
system – Obstacle avoidance Radar – Automatic Parking System - Electric vehicles.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Tom Denton, "Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems", 5th Edition, Edward Arnold Publishers,
London, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Hollembeak& Barry, "Automotive Electricity, Electronics & Computer Controls", Delmar Publishers, New York,
2002.
2. Tim & Gilles, "Automotive Engines: Diagnosis, Repair, Rebuilding", 8th Edition, Delmar Publishers, New York,
2017.
3 Ribbens William B., “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 8th Edition, Butterworth- Heinemann, Burlington,
2017

CO1 interpret the continuous changes in emission norms of India and uses of electronic devices Understanding
in automobile applications. (K2)
CO2 describe the operations of charging and starting techniques involved in Vehicles. Understanding
(K2)
CO3 utilize the principles of electronic ignition and fuel injection system used in automobile Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the engine and fuel control system for ECU used in engine management system Applying (K3)
CO5 employ the essential comfort and safety systems for automobile. Applying (K3)

CO1 2 1 2 3 3 3 2
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 3 1 1 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 3 3 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 40 50 100
ESE 15 50 35 100
20ECE32 - PRINCIPLES OF MACHINE LEARNING
Programme &
Branch
Linear Algebra and Transforms, Calculus and
Complex Analysis
Preamble To understand the principles of machine learning and its applications to classification and prediction
problems.
Unit - I Random Process: 9
Random variables - Multivariate random variables – Transformation of Random variable -Parameters - Gaussian
Distribution - Joint Distributions –Conditional Distributions - Bayesian rule
Unit - II Parametric Modeling: 9

Parameter estimation – regression – classification – bias-variance dilemma –Regularization-Maximum likelihood –
Bayesian Inference-Curse of dimensionality – Validation
Unit - III Classification: 9

Bayesian Classification – Naïve Bayes - Decision Surfaces – Logistic regression – Scatter Matrices – Fisher
discriminant: Two class,Multiclass – Ada-Boost – Log-Loss function
Unit - IV Convex functions: 9

Convex sets and functions – Properties of Projections – Application to classification and regression – Online
learning cases
Unit - V Sparsity-Aware Learning : 9

Norms – LASSO - Sparset solutions-Compressed sensing – Dimensionality reduction – Application to image
Denoising.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Sergious Theodoridis, “Machine Learning: A Bayesian and optimization perspective”,2 nd Edition, Academic
Press, USA, 2020.
REFERENCES:
1. Trevor Hastie, "The Elements of Statistical Learning: Data Mining, Inference and Prediction", 12th Edition,
Springer, New York, 2017.
2. MehryarMohri, "Foundations of Machine Learning", 2nd Edition, MIT Press, USA, 2018.

CO1 apply concepts from multivariate random process Applying (K3)
CO2 interpret regression models and measure their performance Applying (K3)
CO3 use various classification models to solve real world applications Applying (K3)
Understanding
CO4 summarize convex functions and its properties
(K2)
Understanding
CO5 identify various methods that exploits sparsity in the data.
(K2)

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 1 1 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 2 2 3
CO4 2 1 2 2 2
CO5 2 1 1 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 50 40 100
CAT2 10 60 30 100
CAT3 40 60 100
ESE 10 60 30 100
20ECE33– NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY SUSTAINABILITY
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To impart knowledge on nanotechnology, synthesis of nanomaterials, analysis and its uses in energy
storage applications.
Unit - I Nanoscience and Technology: 6
Emerging trends in nanoscience and technology, Challenges in nanoscience and technology, carbon age-new form
of carbon (CNT to Graphene), Optical, electrical, mechanical, magnetic properties.
Unit - II Synthesis of Nanomaterials: 6
Top-Down and Bottom-up approach, Chemical precipitation, Sol-gel synthesis, Microwave heating and Electro
deposition, Types of Nanocomposite (i.e. metal oxide and polymer based).
Unit - III Structural, Electrochemical Measurements and Analysis: 6
X-ray diffraction, Raman Spectroscopy, BET analysis, Cyclic Voltammetry, Galvanostatic charge and Discharge
measurements, Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy.
Unit - IV Renewable Energy Storage Mechanism 6
Ragone Plot, Batteries: Lithium ion Battery, Supercapacitor: Taxonomy of Supercapacitor, EDLC, PSeudocapactior,
Hybrid Supercapacitor.
Unit - V Applications of Nanomaterials in Energy Conversion and Storage: 6
Solar cells and Batteries, Fuel Cells, PEM fuel cell. Acid/ alkaline fuel cells, design of fuel cells, Carbon Nanotubes
for energy storage, Rechargeable batteries based on nanomaterials.
List of Experiments:
1. Simulation and Analysis of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell
2. Electrochemical workstation studies for calculating specific capacitance using cyclic voltammetry
3. Electrochemical workstation studies for calculating specific capacitance, energy density and power density
using galvanostatic charge and discharge measurements
4. Electrochemical workstation studies for calculating ESR and charge transfer resistance using Electrochemical
Impedance Spectroscopy
5. Fabrication and testing of Supercapacitor
6. Analyze the battery parameters using electrochemical workstation
Lecture :30, Practical :30, Total: 60
TEXT BOOK:
1. Charles P. Poole JR. & Franks. J. Qwens, "Introduction to Nanotechnology", 1st Edition, Wiley India Edition ,
New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Mick Wilson &KamaliKannagara, "Nanotechnology - Basics Science and Emerging Technologies", 1st Edition,
Overseas Press , New Delhi, 2005.
2. Pradeep .T, "Nano the Essential Nanoscience and Nanotechnology", 1st Edition, McGraw hill, New Delhi,
2012.
3. Linden, "Hand book of Batteries and fuel cells", 4th Edition, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
1. MATLAB/Simulink
2. OrigaViewer&OrigaMaster

CO1 understand the fundamentals of nanoscience and technology Understanding
(K2)
CO2 apply the methods to synthesize nanomaterials for energy storage devices Applying (K3)
CO3 comprehend the structural and electrochemical analysis of nanomaterials Understanding
(K2)
CO4 understand the working principles of energy storage devices Understanding
(K2)
CO5 design supercapacitor, fuel cell and batteries Applying (K3)
CO6 simulate and analyze the types of fuel cell Analyzing (K4)
Precision (S3)
CO7 demonstrate the operation of electrochemical workstation and analyze the Analyzing (K4)
electrochemical measurements Articulation (S4)
CO8 fabricate supercapacitor device and analyze the electrochemical measurements Analyzing (K4)
Articulation (S4)

CO1 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2
CO4 3 3
CO5 3 2 2 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
CO7 3 3 3 3
CO8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 60 20 100
CAT2 10 30 50 100
CAT3 15 45 40 100
ESE 15 45 40 100
20ECE34 - SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING

Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the concepts and apply the skills needed for software quality assurance and testing.
Unit - I Software Quality Assurance and Review Techniques: 9
Defining Quality –Need for Quality –Quality Control Vs Quality assurance –Quality assurance at each phase of
SDLC - Need for SQA group in an Organization. Structured walkthroughs –Inspections –Various roles and
responsibilities involved in Reviews / Inspections –Some psychological aspects of reviews.
Unit - II Software Measurement and Metrics: 9

Product quality –Models for software product Quality –Process Quality. Measurement and Metrics: Introduction –
Measurement during software life cycle context –Defect metrics –Metrics for software maintenance –Classification of
software metrics –Requirements related metrics –Measurements and process improvement –Measurement
principles
Unit - III Basics of Testing: 9

Introduction- Definition- Need for Testing- Testing Approaches-Essentials, features and principles of software
Testing. Testing Environment: Assessing Capabilities, Staff Competency, and User Satisfaction-Creating an
environment supportive of software testing -Building the software testing process – Testing Guidelines.
Unit - IV Basics of Software Testing process: 9

Overview -The Seven Step Software Testing Process - Organizing for testing-Workbench-Procedure, Developing
the test plan-Workbench-Procedure, Verification testing-Workbench-Procedure -Validation testing-Workbench-
Procedure.
Unit - V Software Testing process: 9

Analyzing and reporting test results-Workbench-Procedure, Testing software system security-Testing client/server
systems-Testing web-based systems - Using Agile Methods to Improve Software Testing.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Nina S. Godbole, "Software Quality Assurance Principles and Practice", 2nd Edition, Narosa I,II
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Perry William, "Effective Methods for Software Testing", 3rd Edition, Wiley, New Delhi,2006. III,IV,V
REFERENCES:
1. Mordechai Ben-Menachem & Garry S. Marliss, "Software Quality", 2nd Edition, Vikas PublishingHouse Pvt.
Ltd, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Limaye M.G, "Software Testing -Principles, Techniques and Tools", 1st Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2009.
3. RajaniRenu & Oak Pradeep, "Software Testing Effective Methods: Tools and Techniques", 2nd Edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017.

CO1 identify the components of software quality assurance systems Understanding
(K2)
CO2 apply the concepts, metrics, and models in software quality assurance Applying (K3)
CO3 apply the step by step activities and set up environment for software testing Applying (K3)
CO4 develop procedures and workbenches for various testing process. Applying (K3)
CO5 apply testing for client server, web based and software security systems and identify the Applying (K3)
agile methods for improving the testing process.

CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 50 20 100
CAT2 20 50 30 100
CAT3 20 50 30 100
ESE 25 30 45 100
PE: GROUP-VI
20ECE35 - RADAR ENGINEERING
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Antenna and Wave Propagation 8 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To gain knowledge in the different types of radar systems used for air-traffic control, long range
surveillance and early-warning systems
Unit - I Radar and Radar Equation: 9
Introduction- Basic Radar –The simple form of the Radar Equation- Radar Block Diagram-Applications of Radar –
Detection of Signals in Noise- Receiver Noise and the Signal-to-Noise Ratio-Probability Density Functions-
Probabilities of Detection and False Alarm- Integration of Radar Pulses, transmitter power, Pulse Repetition
Frequency
Unit - II MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar: 9

Introduction to Doppler and MTI Radar– Delay line cancelers—Staggered PRF-Doppler filter banks- Moving Target
Detector – Limitations to MTI Performance – Pulse Doppler Radar
Unit - III Tracking Radar: 9

Tracking with Radar –Monopulse Tracking –Conical Scan and Sequential Lobing – Limitations to Tracking Accuracy
– Low-Angle Tracking – Tracking in Range –Comparison of Trackers
Unit - IV Detection of Signals in Noise and Radar Waveform Design 9

Detection Criteria – Detectors –-Automatic Detection – Integrators – Constant-False-Alarm Rate Receivers – The
Radar operator – Signal Management
Theoretical accuracy of radar measurements – Range and Doppler accuracy, uncertainty relation. Pulse
compression
Unit - V Phased Array and Navigational Aids: 9
Phased Arrays – Basic concepts, feeds, phase shifters, frequency scan arrays, applications, advantages and
limitations. Navigational Aids: VOR, ILS and LORAN
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. M.I. Skolnik, Introduction to Radar Systems, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 44 th Reprint, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. G.S.N. Raju, Radar Engineering and Fundamentals of Navigational Aids, I.K. International, New Delhi, 2019.
2. Gottapu Sasi Bhushana Rao, Microwave and Radar Engineering, Pearson Education, Chennai, 1st Edition,
2014.

CO1 Identify the parameters of radar systems Applying (K3)
CO2 distinguish the pulse doppler radar and MTI radar system Understanding (K2)
CO3 compare the various types of tracking radar Understanding (K2)
CO4 infer the method of detecting signals in noise and waveform design Understanding (K2)
CO5 outline the principle of radar in phased array and navigational aids system Understanding (K2)

CO1 3 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 1 2
CO3 3 1 2
CO4 3 1 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 15 65 20 100
CAT2 15 85 100
CAT3 15 85 100
ESE 10 70 15 100
20ECE36 - RF COMMUNICATIONS
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To study the RF System design at the implementation level and to understand the design of Low Noise
Amplifiers, Phase Locked Loop, Oscillators and 60 GHz technology
Unit - I Transceiver Architectures: 9
Receiver: Homodyne – Heterodyne. Transmitter: Direct up conversion - Two step up conversion
60GHz channel characterizationn & modeling – Introduction to wireless channel modeling – deterministic &
stochastic modeling
Unit - II Receiver Design: 9
LNA topologies - Low Noise Amplifiers – Single ended and differential LNAs. PLL: Linearised Model - Phase
detectors – Loop filters and charge pumps - Mixer: Characteristics – Multiplier based mixers - Single balanced and
active double balanced mixers
Unit - III Device Implementation 9
60 GHz Radio Implementation in Silicon – Introduction & Overview – Front End Components – 60 GHz LNAs in
SiGe and CMOS – PAs in SiGe and CMOS – Process variability in silicon millimeter wave design – Frequency
synthesis and Radio Architectures
Unit - IV OFDM based WLAN using 60GHz technology 9
OFDM physical layer implemented on FPGA – design of OFDM physical layer – OFDM baseband receiver
architecture – receiver front end – receiver back end – Next generation multi-Gbps OFDM physical layer
Unit - V IEEE standards - MAC for 60GHz 9
Design issues in the use of directional antennas - IEEE 802.15.3c MAC for 60GHz – Neighbor discovery –
Aggregation and BLOCK – ACK.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Su-khiong (SK) Yong, Pengfei Xia and Alberto Valdes Garcia, 60 GHz Technology – From Theory to
Practice, III,IV,V
A John Wiley and Sons Ltd. Publication, 2011.
2. Thomas H. Lee, Design of CMOS RF Integrated Circuits, 2nd Edition, Cambridge University Press, UK,
I,II
2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Razavi B, RF Microelectronics, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2011.

CO1 characterize the RF transceiver architecture with channel modelling. Understanding
(K2)
CO2 apply the concepts of RF receiver design Applying (K3)
CO3 comprehend the issues in the implementation of 60 GHz transmission technology Understanding
(K2)
CO4 apply the concepts of 60GHz technology for the implementation of OFDM in WLAN Applying (K3)
CO5 apply the concepts of 60 GHz technology for the implementation of WPAN Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 1 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 45 35 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
20ECE37 - RISC ARCHITECTURE

Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the principles of interfacing, programming and debugging using ARM Cortex
Microprocessors for real time applications
Unit - I ARM Cortex M Processors: 9
Overview of Cortex M Processors- Advantages- Evolution- Architecture - Programmer's Model- Application Program
Status Register-System Control Block- Resets- Instruction Set.
Unit - II CMSIS Standard and Cortex M Programming: 9

Software Development Flow- Software Flow- Inputs, outputs, and peripherals accesses- Microcontroller interfaces-
Introduction to Cortex Microcontroller Software Interface standard (CMSIS)- Organization and Standardization of
CMSIS Core- CMSIS Core Structure-Usage and benefits-Versions of CMSIS.
Unit - III Memory System and Interrupts: 9

Memory System Features Overview- Memory Maps- Memory Endianness- Memory Access Attributes- Default
Memory Access Permissions- Bit-Band Operations- Unaligned Transfers- Exclusive Accesses. Exception Types-
Interrupt Management- Priorities- Exception sequence- NVIC and SCB registers for exception control- Interrupt
Masking.
Unit - IV Floating Point: 9

Single precision- half precision and double precision floating point numbers- Floating Point Unit- Overview and
Registers- Lazy Stacking, DSP Applications using FPU
Unit - V Embedded OS and Keil MDK: 9

Getting Started with uVision- Project Options- Using IDE and debugger- Optimization Options- Keil RTX Real Time
Kernel- CMSIS - OS examples on semaphores- Mutual Exclusion- Message Queue- Mail Queue- Timer and Signal
Event Communication- OS aware debugging
.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Joseph Yiu, "The Definitive Guide to ARM_ Cortex_-M3 and Cortex-M4 Processors", 3rd Edition, Newnes, USA,
2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Trevor Martin, "The Designer’s Guide to the Cortex-M Processor Family- A tutorial Approach", 1st Edition,
Newnes, USA, 2013.
2. Trevor Martin, "The Insider's Guide to the STM32 ARM Based Microcontroller", 1st Edition, Hitex(UK) Ltd, UK,
2008.
3. http://infocenter.arm.com/help/topic/com.arm.doc.ddi0439b/DDI0439B_cortex_m4_r0p0_trm.pdf

CO1 summarize the features and architecture of ARM Cortex M processor Understanding (K2)
CO2 explain the role of CMSIS core in ARM Cortex programming Understanding (K2)
CO3 differentiate between the different memory system configurations and interrupt Understanding (K2)
schemes
CO4 develop application programs using floating point operations in ARM Cortex Applying (K3)
CO5 build OS based applications on ARM Cortex M using Keil MDK. Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 5 35 60 100
ESE 15 50 35 100
20ECE38 - REMOTE SENSING
Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the fundamental concepts of Remote Sensing and Image processing techniques to
process the satellite data.
Unit - I Basic concepts and data capturing mechanisms 9
Basic concepts: Definition, Remote sensing process, Radiation principles, Spectral reflectance curve, EMR
interactions with-atmosphere-earth surface features, Resolution types. Data capturing mechanisms: Along track
scanning, Across track scanning.
Unit - II Remote Sensing Platforms: 9
Space borne, Landsat satellite program, Thematic mapper spectral bands, Landsat image interpretation, Spot
satellite program, Spot image interpretation, IRS satellite program, IRS image interpretation, High resolution satellite
system, Space station remote sensing, Air borne.
Unit - III Remote Sensing Types: 9
Multi spectral scanning, Infrared, Thermal remote sensing, Thermal scanning, radiation principles, Data
interpretation, temperature mapping, Hyper spectral scanning, Image analysis techniques, Microwave sensing, Side
looking radar systems, Synthetic aperture radar, Radar image characteristics, Radar image interpretation, LIDAR
remote sensing, Microwave radiometers, Microwave scanners.
Unit - IV Satellite image analysis and GIS: 9
Georeferencing, Enhancement, Feature extraction, Classification.GIS: Spatial data, Attribute data, GIS data
integration and analysis.
Unit - V Applications of Remote Sensing : 9
Agricultural Applications, Forestry Applications, Rangeland Applications, Water Resource Applications, Snow and
Ice Applications, Urban and Regional Planning Applications.
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Thomas M.Lillesand, Ralph W.Kiefer, "Remote Sensing And Image Interpretation", 7th Edition, John Wiley, New
Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. John R. Jensen, “Remote Sensing Of The Environment – An Earth Resource Perspective”, 2nd Edition,Pearson
Education Series, 2003.
2. Rafael C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”,3 rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
3. Robert A. Schowengerdt, “Remote Sensing Models & Methods For Image Processing”, 3 rd Edition,Academic
Press 2007.
4. J. A. Richards “Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis: An Introduction”, 5th Edition,Springer-Verlag Berlin
Heidelberg, 1993.

CO1 describe the electromagnetic remote sensing process and data capturing mechanisms. Understanding
(K2)
CO2 explain theplatforms used for data acquiring process. Understanding
(K2)
CO3 understand the different types of remote sensing and radar. Understanding
(K2)
CO4 apply image processing technique to process satellite data with GIS for solving societal Applying (K3)
issues.
CO5 select and process the satellite data for real time applications Applying (K3)

CO1 3 1
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 30 70 100
CAT3 20 50 30 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
20ECE39 – COMPUTER DESIGN AUTOMATION FOR VLSI CIRCUITS

Programme &
Branch
Preamble To understand the concepts of CAD algorithms for VLSI physical design automation
Unit - I Design Methodologies: 9
Introduction to VLSI Design methodologies, Review of VLSI Design automation tools, Algorithmic Graph Theory and
Computational Complexity, Tractable and Intractable problems, General purpose methods for combinatorial
optimization problems.
Unit - II Partitioning and Placement: 9
Placement, Circuit representation, Placement algorithms, Partitioning, Partitioning algorithms, Placement and
Partitioning based on Genetic Algorithm
Unit - III Floorplanning and Compaction: 9

Floorplanning concepts, shape functions and floorplan sizing, Floorplanning based on Simulated
Annealing.Compaction, Layout Compaction, Design rules, Problem formulation, Algorithms for constraint graph
Compaction.
Unit - IV Routing: 9
Types of Local Routing problems, Area routing, Channel routing, Introduction to Global Routing, Steiner tree
Construction, Algorithms for Global Routing
Unit - V Logic Simulation: 9

Simulation, Gate-level modeling and simulation, Switch-level modeling and simulation. Introduction to Combinational
Logic Synthesis, Binary Decision Diagrams, ROBDD, ROBDD principles, implementation, construction and
manipulation
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Gerez, S.H, "Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation", John Wiley & Sons, New York, Reprint 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Naveed Sherwani, “Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation” ,3rd edition, Springer International
Edition, 2013
2. Sarafzadeh& C.K. Wong, "An Introduction to VLSI Physical Design", McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, Reprint 2007.

CO1 utilize the concepts and properties associated with Graph Theory Applying (K3)
CO2 infer the concepts of partitioning and Placement in VLSI physical design process Understanding
(K2)
CO3 demonstrate the concepts of floorplanning, compaction and routing in VLSI physical Understanding
design (K2)
CO4 apply the concepts of design optimization algorithms and their application to VLSI Applying (K3)
physical design automation
CO5 utilize the concepts of simulation in VLSI design automation Applying (K3)

CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 10 40 50 100
CAT2 10 65 20 100
CAT3 10 50 40 100
ESE 10 40 50 100
20ECE40 BLOCKCHAIN TECHNOLOGIES
Programme&
Branch
Prerequisites Data Communication and Networking 8 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To gain knowledge in the theoretical and practical aspects of blockchain technology
Unit - I Introduction to Blockchain: 9
Financial transaction – Ledger – trustless system – Elements of blockchain – types – Byzantine General Problems –
benefits – challenges – Components and structure of blockchain: blocks – chain – hashing – digital signatures –
example – miners – validators – smart contracts - speed – decentralization Vs distributed systems
Unit - II Cryptography behind Blockchain: 9
Principles – historical perspectives – classical cryptography- types – symmetric – asymmetric – signatures –
hashing. Bitcoin: History – Why bitcoin – keys and addresses – transactions – blocks – bitcoin network – wallets
Unit - III Consensus: 9
Practical Byzantine fault tolerance algorithm – Proof of Work - Proof of Stake - Proof of Authority - Proof of Elapsed
time Cryptocurrency Wallets: Introduction to cryptocurrency wallets - Transactions - Types of cryptocurrency wallets
– Tenancy - Alternate Blockchain
Unit - IV Hyperledger and Enterprise Blockchain 9
History - Hyperledger projects - Hyperledger Burrow - Hyperledger Sawtooth - Hyperledger Fabric - Hyperledger
Iroha - Hyperledger Indy - Tools in Hyperledger – Deploy a simple application on IBM cloud
Unit - V Ethereum: 9
Introducing Ethereum - Components of Ethereum - Ethereum accounts - Ethereum network - Ethereum clients -
Ethereum gas - Ethereum virtual machine - Ethereum block – Ether - Basics of Solidity - Ethereum Development
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Brenn Hill, Samanyu Chopra, Paul Valencourt, “Blockchain Quick Reference: A guide to exploring decentralized
blockchain application development”, 1st Edition, Packt Publishing, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Brenn Hill, Samanyu Chopra & Paul Valencourt, "Blockchain Quick Reference: A guide to exploring
decentralized blockchain application development", 1st Edition, Packt publishing, Mumbai, 2018.
2. Andreas Antonopoulos, "Mastering Bitcoin: Programming the open blockchain", 2nd Edition, O’Reilly Media,
USA, 2017.

CO1 discuss the elements, structure and architecture of a blockchain Understanding (K2)
CO2 describe blockchain cryptography and history of bitcoin Understanding (K2)
CO3 explain consensus and cryptocurrency wallet Understanding (K2)
CO4 deploy a simple application using Hyperledger on IBM cloud Applying (K3)
CO5 develop and analyze a distributed application using Ethereum and Solidity Evaluate(K5)

CO1 3 1
CO2 3 1 2
CO3 2 1 2 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 5 30 65 100
CAT3 5 10 45 40 100
ESE 10 20 30 40 100
* ±3% may be varied (CAT 1, 2, 3 – 50 marks & ESE – 100 marks)
20ECE41 QUANTUM COMPUTING AND INFORMATION
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Linear Algebra and Transform, VLSI Design 8 PE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To provide a broad overview of the field of quantum computation and quantum information by describing
the fundamental elements and different quantum algorithms. Also it describes general design principles
and criteria for good physical implementations of quantum computers.
Unit - I Introduction 9
Global perspectives Linear algebra - The postulates of quantum mechanics - Application: superdense coding - EPR
and the Bell inequality.
Unit - II Quantum circuits 9
Quantum algorithms - Single qubit operations - Controlled operations – Measurement - Universal quantum gates -
Quantum circuit model of computation - Simulation of quantum systems.
Unit - III The quantum Fourier transform and its applications 9
The quantum Fourier transform - Phase estimation – Order finding and factoring - General applications of the
quantum Fourier transform - The quantum search algorithm.
Unit - IV Quantum Information 9
Experimental quantum information processing - Quantum information theory - Quantum error-correction - Fault-
tolerant quantum computation - Quantum cryptography
Unit - V Quantum computers (physical realization) 9
Guiding principles - Conditions for quantum computation - Harmonic oscillator quantum computer - Optical photon
quantum computer - Optical cavity quantum electrodynamics - Ion traps - Nuclear magnetic resonance
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Nielsen M.A & Chuang I.L, "Quantum Computation and Quantum Information", 10th Anniversary Edition,
Cambridge University Press, UK, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Phillip Kaye, Raymond Laflamme& Michele Mosca, "An Introduction to Quantum Computing", 1st Edition,
2. Eleanor Rieffel& Wolfgang Polak, "Quantum Computing: A Gentle Introduction", 1st Edition, MIT Press, USA,
2014.
3. Scott Aaronson, "Quantum Computing Since Democritus", 1st Edition, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2013.

CO1 describe the quantum mechanics using linear algebra Understanding(K2)
CO2 familiar with qubits and designing of quantum gates Applying (K3)
CO3 realize the quantum parallelism by using simplest quantum algorithms Applying (K3))
CO4 understand the basics of quantum information processing Understanding(K2)
CO5 acquire a basic knowledge on physical realization Understanding(K2)

CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 30 60 10 100
CAT2 15 60 25 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 15 60 25 100
OPEN ELECTIVES
20ECO01 WEARABLE TECHNOLOGY
(Offered by Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering)
All BE/BTech Branches except Electronics and

Programme&
Communication Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 4 OE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To understand the concept of wearable sensors, implantables and applications of wearable technology
in disease detections.
Unit - I Introduction to wearables 9
Wearables: Fundamentals, advancements, and a roadmap for the future - The role of wearables-Data-information-
knowledge-value paradigm-The ecosystem enabling digital life-Attributes of wearables-Textiles and clothing: The
meta-wearable-Challenges and opportunities-The future of wearables: Defining the research roadmap
Unit - II From wearables to implantables 9
clinical drive and technical challenges – Introduction-Wearables-Implantables-Instrumented prosthesis and
monitoring of bone regeneration-Regenerative and biohybrid approaches-Packaging, biocompatibility, and
biodegradable materials
Unit - III Disease detection using wearable sensors 9

Wearing sensors inside and outside of the human body for the early detection of diseases – Introduction-
Cardiovascular diseases-Neurological diseases-Gastrointestinal diseases
Unit - IV Mechanical and Chemical sensors 9
Soft mechanical and biochemical sensors - Mechanical sensors-Biochemical sensors-Tears-Saliva-Wound and
interstitial fluids (WF and IF)- Available bioanalytes in WFs and Ifs-Methods of bioanalyte detection in WFs and Ifs-
Challenges of WF and IF-based wearable sensors
Unit - V High frequency sensors and applications 9

UHF epidermal sensors: Technology and applications-Introduction-Rationale of UHF epidermal antennas-Examples
of UHF epidermal antenna systems and manufacturing-Applications to healthcare-Applications to occupational
medicine, wellness, sports-Safety issue
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Sazonov, Edward, ed. Wearable Sensors: Fundamentals, implementation and applications. Academic
Press(Elsevier), 2020.
REFERENCES:
1. Mukhopadhyay, Subhas C., ed. Wearable electronics sensors: For safe and healthy living. Vol. 15. Springer,
2015.

CO1 understand the concept of wearable technology to differentiate from conventional Understanding(K2)
technologies
CO2 differentiate wearables and implantables Understanding(K2)
CO3 use wearable sensors for disease detection and diagnosis Applying(K3)
CO4 interpret the challenges in developing Mechanical and Chemical sensors Understanding(K2)
CO5 identify wearable sensors employing High frequency Applying(K3)

CO1 3
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 1 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 50 40 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
20ECO02 BASICS OF ELECTRONICS IN AUTOMATION APPLIANCES
All BE/BTech Branches except Electronics and

Programme &
Communication Engineering Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Preamble To understand the working principles of electronics in appliances.

Unit - I Introduction to Electronic Components: 9+3
Switches - Mechanical Switches - Poles and Throws - Push-button Switches – Resistors – Capacitors – Diodes –
Transistors – Power Source – Batteries - Soldering – Safety - Applications.
Unit - II Electronics and Sensors in Practice: 9+3
Motors and Controllers – Sensors – Accelerometers - Digital Compasses or Magnetometers - Light and Color
Sensors - Infrared Remote - Microwave Oven - Television (TV) - Washing Machine - Air Conditioner (AC) - Vacuum
Cleaner
Unit - III Electronics in Automotive System Gadgets: 9+3
The Basics of Electronic Engine Control: Concept of an Electronic Engine Control System, Cruise Control
Electronics, Antilock Braking System, Electronic Suspension Control System, Blind Spot Detection, Automatic
Collision Avoidance System
Unit - IV IoT Enabled Automation System Architecture: 9+3
Towards industrial and societal automation and digitization, Arrowhead Framework architecture, Engineering of an
Arrowhead compatible multidomain facility, Component-based engineering methodology, Safety and security
engineering of IoT automation systems. Case study: Complex system management and automation
Unit - V Electronic Product Safety Standards: 9+3
Product Safety Standards: What Is a Standard, Structure of the Product Safety Standard, Conformity to Product
Safety Standards, Types of Product Safety Standards, Objectives for Products Safety Standards, Product
Certification Marks, Means of Protection, Constructive Aspects Related to EMC, Serviceability.

TEXT BOOK:
1. Westcott, S., & Westcott, J. R. (2020). Basic Electronics: Theory and Practice. Stylus Publishing, LLC. unit 1,2
2. William B. Ribbens (2017), Understanding Automotive Electronics an Engineering Perspective, Eighth unit 3-5
edition, Elsevier UAS,ISBN: 978-0-12-810434-7.
REFERENCES:
1. Steli Loznen, Constantin Bolintineanu, Jan Swart (2017), Electrical Product Compliance and Safety
Engineering, Artech House Publishers, First edition, 2017.
2 BY Jerker Delsing (2017), IoT Automation - Arrowhead Framework, CRC Press, USA, first edition 2017.

CO1 explain basic electronic components Understanding(K2)
CO2 demonstrate real life electronic appliances Understanding(K2)
CO3 conceptualize the connected device architecture Applying(K3)
CO4 explain electronics in modern automotive Understanding(K2)
CO5 relate the requirements of safety standard for different products Understanding(K2)

CO1 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO5 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 3

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 20 80 100
CAT2 10 50 40 100
CAT3 10 50 40 100
ESE 10 50 40 100
20ECO03 - PRINCIPLES OF QUANTUM COMPUTING

Programme& All BE/BTech Branches except Electronics and

Branch Communication Engineering
Prerequisites NIL 4 OE 3 0 2 4
Preamble To gain knowledge in the field of quantum computation, different quantum algorithms and its
implementation in quantum computers.
Unit - I Introduction and overview: 9
Global perspectives - Quantum bits - Quantum computation - Quantum algorithms - Experimental quantum
information processing - Quantum information.
Unit - II Introduction to quantum mechanics and Introduction to computer science: 9
Introduction to quantum mechanics: Linear algebra - The postulates of quantum mechanics -Application:
superdense coding - The density operator.
Introduction to computer science: Models for computation - The analysis of computational problems - Perspectives
on computer science.
Unit - III Quantum circuits: 9
Single qubit operations - Controlled operations – Measurement - Universal quantum gates - Quantum circuit model
of computation - Simulation of quantum systems.
Unit - IV The quantum Fourier transform and its applications: 9
The quantum Fourier transform - Phase estimation – Order finding and factoring - General applications of the
quantum Fourier transform - The quantum search algorithm.
Unit - V Quantum computers (physical realization): 9
Guiding principles - Conditions for quantum computation - Harmonic oscillator quantum computer - Optical photon
quantum computer - Optical cavity quantum electrodynamics - Ion traps - Nuclear magnetic resonance

1. Simulation of single qubit gates
2. Deign and simulation of multi qubit gates
3. Simulation of measurement error mitigation
4. Building of Quantum random number generation
5. Implementation of Shor’s algorithm
6. Implementation of Grover’s algorithm

TEXT BOOK:
1. Nielsen M.A & Chuang I.L, "Quantum Computation and Quantum Information", 10th Anniversary Edition,
Cambridge University Press, UK, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Phillip Kaye, Raymond Laflamme& Michele Mosca, "An Introduction to Quantum Computing", 1st Edition,
2. Eleanor Rieffel& Wolfgang Polak, "Quantum Computing: A Gentle Introduction", 1st Edition, MIT Press, USA,
2014.
3. Scott Aaronson, "Quantum Computing Since Democritus", 1st Edition, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2013.

CO1 perceive the definition of qubit, quantum logic gates, quantum circuits and quantum Understanding (K2)
algorithms.
CO2 Interpret the usage of linear algebra in quantum mechanics Understanding (K2)
CO3 Interpret qubits and basic quantum gates. Understanding (K2)
CO4 elucidate the quantum parallelism using simplest quantum algorithms Understanding (K2)
CO5 classify the schemes for implementation of quantum computers. Understanding (K2)
CO6 develop quantum logic gate circuits. Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO7 Build quantum computing applications using quantum operations Applying (K3),
Manipulation (S2)
CO8 implement quantum algorithm Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 1 1
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 3
CO6 3 2 3 2 3 2 2
CO7 3 2 3 2 3 2 2
CO8 3 2 3 2 3 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 70 100
CAT2 20 80 100
CAT3 20 80 100
ESE 25 75 100
20ECO04 - PCB DESIGN AND FABRICATION


Preamble To understand the different types of Printed Circuit Boards, design concepts, steps to fabricate PCB,
different tools for PCB design and component tracing in assembled PCBs
Unit - I Introduction to PCB Designing Concepts: 9
Types of Components used in PCB, Terminologies in PCB Designing, Types of PCBs: Single Sided (Single Layer),
Double Layer and Multi-Layer PCB, Flexible PCB, Materials for PCB manufacturing
Unit - II PCB Design Considerations: 9
PCB Design flow, General, Mechanical and Electrical considerations, Design rules for Analog, Digital and High
frequency circuits. Electromagnetic interference/ Compatibility (EMI/ EMC).
Unit - III Design and Simulation of PCB: 9
Electronic Design Automation (EDA) Tools – Single layer PCB, Two layer PCB. Circuit Design and simulation,
creating footprint, placement and routing, Generating Gerber file for single layer PCB.
Unit - IV PCB Fabrication Techniques: 9
Image transfer techniques. Plating techniques: Immersion, Electro less, Electroplating, Solder Mask, Etching
techniques, Mechanical operations
Unit - V Circuit Tracing and Testing: 9
Soldering techniques, Testing PCB, Environmental concern. Case Studies: Power supply, Token Counter, Wien-
bridge Oscillator.
1. Study of CAD for PCB Design (Eagle CAD or Equivalent Open Source Tool)
2. Soldering and de-soldering the components on the PCB including SMD devices
3. Design and Simulation of 230V AC to 5V/9V/12V DC Power Supply in CAD Tool
4. Design, simulating, assembling and soldering of IR Sensor Module
5. Preparation of layout from the circuit design
6. Trouble shooting of single layer and multi-layer PCB

TEXT BOOK:
1. Khandpur R.S., "Printed Circuit Board: Design, Fabrication, Assembly and Testing", 1st Edition, McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Mehta S.D, "Electronic Product Design", 1st Edition, S Chand Publications, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Clyde Coombs, "Printed Circuits Handbook", 6th Edition, McGraw Hill Professional, New Delhi, 2007.

CO1 classify the different types of PCBs Understanding (K2)
CO2 describe the PCB design rules and considerations Understanding (K2)
CO3 apply the PCB design rules to design and simulate single layer PCB Applying (K3)
CO4 demonstrate single layer PCB for a given circuit Applying (K3)
CO5 interpret and trace the assembled electronic components on PCB Understanding (K2)
CO6 develop the PCB design using a simulation software Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO7 fabricate single layer PCB Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8 Identify and rectify the faults in a PCB Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 2
CO6 3 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO7 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO8 3 3 3 3 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 50 50 100
CAT2 20 45 35 100
CAT3 10 35 55 100
ESE 25 40 35 100
20ECO05 - NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC FOR ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS


Preamble To gain knowledge on application development using Neural network and Fuzzy Logic Systems.
Unit - I Introduction To Neural Networks: 9
Introduction, Humans and Computers, Organization of the Brain, Biological Neuron, characteristics of ANN, Types of
Neuron Activation Function, Terminologies of ANN - Learning Strategy (Supervised, Unsupervised, Reinforcement) -
McCulloch-Pitts Model – Hebb Rule.
Unit - II Supervised Learning Networks: 9
Perceptron Network : Theory – Architecture- Learning Rule, Back Propagation Network : Theory – Architecture-
Training and Testing Algorithm.
Unit - III Advanced Neural Network: 9
Support Vector Machine Classifier – Decision tree classifier- Random Forest Classifier – Extreme Learning Machine
( Training and testing algorithms only).
Unit - IV Fuzzy Logic Systems: 9
Introduction to fuzzy logic - Classical sets and fuzzy sets - Fuzzy relations - Membership function – Fuzzification -
Defuzzification.
Unit - V Fuzzy Inference System: 9
Fuzzy rules and reasoning: Fuzzy If-Then Rules. Fuzzy Inference Systems (FIS)-Mamdani model-Sugeno model -
Tsukamoto model- Applications: weather forecasting, temperature control and banking

1. Implement logic function using a single linear perceptron network
2. Build a Multilayer perceptron and observe the effect on the output by changing number of hidden layers and
neurons in each layer
3. Extract GLCM Features and Gabor Features for an application
4. Implement a Back Propagation Algorithm for classification and plot the error surface for pattern classification
5. Implement a Support vector machine Algorithm for classification and plot the error surface for pattern
classification
6. Implement a two input two rule Mamdaniand Sugeno FIS for an application
7.. Implement a Fuzzy logic system for any one application
TEXT BOOK:
1. Rajasekharan S. &Vijayalakshmipai G.A., "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic, Genetic Algorithms: Synthesis and
Applications", 1st Edition, PHI Publication, New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Timothy J. Ross, "Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications", 3rd Edition, Willey, New Delhi, 2010.
2. Sivanandam S.N., Sumathi S. &Deepa N., "Introduction to Neural Networks using MATLAB 6.0", 7th Edition,

CO1 understand the concepts of neural network Understanding (K2)
CO2 develop Neural Network Architecture using Perceptron and BPN learning Applying (K3)
CO3 develop Neural Network Architecture using SVM, ELM and random forest classifier Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the concepts of fuzzy logic Applying (K3)
CO5 apply Neural network and Fuzzy logic for real time problems Applying (K3)
CO6 derive features for pattern classification Applying (K3),
Manipulation (S2)
CO7 build fuzzy logic control application Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8 develop neural network architecture for pattern classification and recognition Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 1 1 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO6
3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO7 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO8 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 30 30 40 100
CAT2 20 60 20 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
20ECO06 - ELECTRONIC HARDWARE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Preamble To carryout troubleshooting of consumer electronic equipment and to use the testing equipment for
testing, analysis and troubleshooting purpose
Unit - I Introduction to Troubleshooting and Failure Analysis and Prevention in Electronic Circuits: 9
Troubleshooting Basics - Common Troubleshooting Techniques -Gaining Circuit Familiarity -Getting Prepared for
Troubleshooting. Failure Analysis and Prevention in Electronic Circuits: Failure Symptoms -Failure -Causes Failure
Types - Some Useful Terms in Failure.
Unit - II Device Troubleshooting and Troubleshooting Industrial Controls: 9
Device Troubleshooting: Tools for Servicing- Test and Measuring Instruments- Safety Issues – Test and Tagging of
Portable Electrical Equipment. Troubleshooting Industrial Controls: Fundamentals-Types of controllers-Repair and
Testing procedures-Preventive Maintenance.
Unit - III Troubleshooting Residential ,Wireless Communication Systems: 9
Lighting and Control system Repair-TV distribution system Repair- Fiber optic Communication Repair-Case study:
Color CRT TV monitor troubleshooting
Unit - IV Troubleshooting Digital Circuits: 9
Moving from Analog to Digital -Moving into the Digital Circuits - Typical Faults in Digital Systems-Digital Circuit
Trouble shooters-Digital Integrated Circuits -Programmable Logic Device (PLD) and Memory Definitions.
Unit - V PCB Testing and Soldering Techniques and Maintenance and Safety Aspects: 9
Soldering--Printed Circuit Board -Troubleshooting of Surface Mounted PCBs -Testing and Troubleshooting with
ATE. Maintenance and Safety Aspects: Types of Maintenance, Advantages of Preventive Maintenance -Importance
of Sound Maintenance Management -Maintenance Policy -Safety Aspects.
1. Dismantling and Assembling of electronic hardware.
2. Study of testing equipment and Troubleshooting of digital circuits
3. Troubleshooting of speakers and amplifiers
4. Troubleshooting of home appliances – Radio / TV
5. Troubleshooting of home appliances – Microwave Oven / Induction Stove
6. Troubleshooting of wireless communication system – PCB of Mobile phone/Modem
TEXT BOOK:
1. Daniel R. Tomal& Aram S. Agajanian, "Electronic Troubleshooting", 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, New
Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Khandpur .R.S, "Troubleshooting Electronic Equipment: Includes Repair And Maintenance", 2nd Edition,
McGraw-Hill Education (India) Private Limited, New Delhi, 2011.
2. ShashiBhushan Sinha, "Handbook of Repair and Maintenance Of Domestic Electronics Appliances
handbook", 1st Edition, BPB Publications, , 2017.
3. Michael Jaygeier, "How to Dagnose and Fix Everything Electronic", 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill Education
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2015.

CO1 explain troubleshooting principles for testing and point out the failures of electronic Understanding (K2)
equipment.
CO2 interpret the use of testing tools and instruments for troubleshooting electronic Understanding (K2)
hardware.
CO3 predict the electrical fault in home appliances. Understanding (K2)
CO4 apply troubleshooting principles for testing of digital circuits. Applying (K3)
CO5 employ PCB Testing, soldering techniques and summarize maintenance &safety Applying (K3)
aspects
CO6 identify the active and passive components and apply troubleshooting procedures for Applying (K3),
digital circuits and amplifiers. Precision (S3)
CO7 determinethe faults and troubleshoot the home appliances using multimeter. Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8 design a PCB based circuit with troubleshooting. Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 1
CO5 2 1
CO6 3 3 3 2 1 1
CO7 3 3 3 2 1 1
CO8 3 3 3 2 1 1

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 40 60 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 20 50 30 100
20ECO07 - BIOINSPIRED COMPUTING TECHNOLOGIES

Programme& All BE/BTech Branches except Electronics
Branch and Communication Engineering
Preamble To acquire and familiarize with different types of bio inspired computing techniques for solving
optimization problems.
Features of Evolutionary Computation -Advantages of Evolutionary Computation - Applications of Evolutionary
Computation.
Genetic Algorithms: Introduction - Conventional Optimization and Search Techniques - Advantages and Limitations
of Genetic Algorithm-Terminologies and Operators of GA..
Unit - II Operators and Applications: 6
Advanced Operators and Techniques in Genetic Algorithm-Classification of Genetic Algorithm-Application of GA in
solving combinatorial optimization problems
Unit - III PSO Algorithm: 6
PSO Algorithm - Accelerated PSO – Implementation - Convergence Analysis - Binary PSO – Applications. Ant Colony
Optimization – Characteristics- Algorithm –Applications.
Unit - IV Advanced Optimization Algorithm: 6
Cuckoo Life Style -– flowchart –Algorithm , Bat Algorithms - Echolocation of Bats - Flowchart- algorithm, Bee-Inspired
Algorithms – flowchart – algorithm
Unit - V Hybrid Optimization Algorithm: 6
Teacher-Learner Based Optimization algorithm-Jaya Algorithm – Hybrid Optimization algorithm (Any Two)
1. Solving a cost function using GA tool
2. Optimization of a cost function using PSO algorithm for an application
3. Optimization of a cost function using ACO algorithm for an application
4. Optimization of a cost function using Cuckoo search algorithm for an application
5. Optimization of a cost function using Bat algorithm for an application
6. Optimization of a cost function using TLBO /Jaya algorithm for an application
TEXT BOOK:
1. Sivanandam S. N &Deepa S.N, "Introduction to Genetic Algorithms", 1 stEdition, Springer, USA, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. OmidBozorg - Haddad , "Advanced Optimization by Nature-Inspired Algorithms", Springer, Volume 720,
Singapore, 2018.
2. SrikantaPatnaik, Xin-She Yang & Kazumi Nakamatsu, "Nature-Inspired Computing and Optimization Theory
and Applications", Springer, Volume 10,USA, 2017.

CO1 infer the concepts of Evolutionary Computation Understanding (K2)
CO2 relate an optimization problem with GA Understanding (K2)
CO3 apply the advanced GA operators for machine learning and image processing Applying (K3)
CO4 apply the concepts of PSO and ACO in optimization problems Applying (K3)
CO5 infer the concepts of Advanced Search algorithms Applying (K3)
CO6 experiment the concepts of PSO and ACO using software tools Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO7 experiment the concepts of cuckoo search and bat algorithm using software tools Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8 experiment the concepts of TLBO and Jaya algorithm using software tools Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 3
CO6 3 2 2 3 3
CO7 3 2 2 3 3
CO8 3 2 2 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 50 50 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 20 40 40 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
20ECO08 OPTICAL ENGINEERING

Programme&
Branch
Prerequisites - 8 OE 3 0 0 3
Preamble To study the fundamentals of Optical System Design with emphasis on optical system which are based
on lens architectures
Unit - I Optics Overview: 9
The Electromagnetic Spectrum – Light Wave Propagation – Snell’s Law of Refraction – The Action of Simple Lenses
and Prisms on Wave Fronts – Interference and Diffraction – The Photoelectric Effect
Unit - II Gaussian Optics: 9
Introduction - Cardinal Points of an Optical System – Image Position and Size – A collection of Imagery Equations –
Optical Systems Not Immersed in Air
Unit - III Paraxial Optics and Calculations: 9
Refraction of a Light Ray at a single surface – The Paraxial Region – Paraxial Raytracing through several surfaces –
Focal Points and Principal Points – The Thin Lens – Mirrors
Unit - IV Optical System Considerations: 9
Systems of Separated Components – Focal lengths of two component systems – The Optical Invariant – Matrix
Optics – The y-y bar diagram – The Scheimpflug Condition – Summary of sign conventions
Unit - V The Basics of Lens Design: 9
Introduction – The Simple Meniscus Camera Lens –The Symmetrical Principle – Achromatic Telescope Objectives –
The Diffractive Surface in Lens Design – Third Order Theory
Total:45
TEXT BOOK:
1.
Warren J. Smith, Modern Optical Engineering, 4th Edition, McGraw Hill Publication, 2008.
REFERENCES:
1. Anthony Vanderlugt, Optical Signal Processing, 1st Edition, Wiley – Interscience, 2005.
2. B.E.A. Saleh, M.C. Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2012

CO1 characterize and understand the Optical System Design fundamentals Understanding (K2)
CO2 comprehend the Gaussian Optical system Design principle Understanding (K2)
CO3 apply the concept of paraxial approximation technique for optical system design Applying (K3)
CO4 develop optical design considerations for the implementation of Two Component Optical Applying (K3)
Systems
CO5 apply the concepts of optical system design for the development of Lens based Systems Applying (K3)

CO1 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO5 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2

Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 40 60 100
CAT2 20 40 40 100
CAT3 10 30 60 100
ESE 20 40 40 100
20ECO09 - NEURAL NETWORKS AND DEEP LEARNING WITH PYTHON

Preamble To understand about the mathematical, statistical and computational challenges of building stable
representation of high dimensional data using Neural Network and Deep learning Algorithms
Unit – I Python Basics : 6
Introduction –Literal Constants – Variables and Identifiers – Data Types Operations on Strings, File Handling – Data
Structures: Sequence – Lists - Functional Programming – Tuple – Sets - Dictionaries, NumPy Arrays and Data
Visualization packages
Unit – II Introduction to Neural Networks 6
Neural Networks :Definition – McCulloch-Pitts’s Neuron – Types of activation function – Types of network
architectures – Learning processes, Neuron model creation using Python programming
Unit – III Deep Feed forward Networks: 6

Example Learning XOR; Hidden Units; Gradient Descent- Feed forward neural networks - Back propagation with
respect to : Loss, Intermediate nodes, Input –Regularization for Deep Learning;
Unit – IV Convolutional Networks: 6
The convolution operation; Motivation; Pooling; Variants of basic Convolution Function; Efficient Convolution
Algorithms; Generative Adversarial Networks
Unit – V 1D and 2D Applications: 6
Linear Regression and Logistic regression for any dataset, Signal and Image classification- Model building and
evaluation, Performance metrics analysis

1. Perform data manipulation using NumPy and data visualization packages
2. Create feed forward Neural network model using python programming
3. Create Convolutional Neural network model using python programming
4. Analyze Linear and logistic regression using python
5. Perform ANN classification for 1D data
6. Perform CNN classification for 2D data
TEXT BOOK:
1. Neural Networks & Deep Learning, Pat Nakamoto, Kindle Edition, 2016.
REFERENCES:
1. Neural Network and Deep Learning, Michael Nielsen, Online Book, 2016
2. Deep Learning, Ian Goodfellow, YoshuaBengio and Aaron Courville, MIT Press, ISBN: 9780262035613, 2016.

CO1 understand the basic concepts, functions and data structures of Python Understanding (K2)
Programming
CO2 make use of python packages to create neural network model Applying (K3)
CO3 build the feed forward neural network model Applying (K3)
CO4 build the convolutional neural network model Applying (K3)
CO5 determine the performance metric for signal and image processing applications Applying (K3)
CO6 perform data manipulation using NumPy and data visualization Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO7 apply the feed forward neural network model for 1D data Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)
CO8 apply the convolutional neural network model for 2D data Applying (K3),
Precision (S3)

CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 3 2
CO3 3 2 3 1 2
CO4 3 2 3 1 2
CO5 3 2 3 1 2
CO6 3 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO7 3 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO8 3 3 2 2 3 3 2

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 20 50 30 100
CAT2 30 30 40 100
CAT3 30 30 40 100
ESE 30 40 30 100
20GEO01 - GERMAN LANGUAGE LEVEL 1
Programme &
All Engineering and Technology Branches Sem. Category L T P Credit
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 5/6/7/8 HS 4 0 0 4
Preamble This course serves as an introduction to the German language and awareness towards German lifestyle
and cultural aspects of Germany and German speaking countries. One can learn to introduce oneself
and able to gain the basic day to day vocabulary. On keen learning one would be able to understand the
sentence structure and be able to reciprocate to basic questions.
Unit - I Good Day (Guten Tag) 12
Greetings, Self-introduction and introducing others, Numbers, Alphabets, Countries and languages spoken.
Grammar – W questions, Simple sentences, Verb conjugation and personal pronoun.
Unit - II Friends & Colleague ( Freund und Kollegen): 12
Hobbies, Profession, Week, Months, Season and Generate Profile. Grammar – Articles, Plural, Verbs – have and to
be, Yes/No questions.
Unit - III In the City (In der Stadt): 12
Name of places/buildings in the city, asking for directions, Understanding means of transport. Grammar – definite and
indefinite articles, Negation articles and Imperative.
Unit - IV Food and Appointment (Essen und Termin): 12
Food, Shopping, initiate conversations to understand and do shopping. Grammar – Accusative case, Verbs with
Accusative. Understanding time and reciprocating, Appointments, Asking excuse, Family. Grammar – Prepositions:
am, um, von...bis, Possessive articles- mein, dein.., Modal verbs- müssen, können, wollen
Unit - V Socializing ( Zeit mit Freunden): 12
Planning together, Birthday, Invitation, Restaurant, looking for specific information in texts. Grammar – Separable
verbs, Prepositions with Accusative case, Past tense of have and to be, Personal pronoun with Accusative.
Total:60
TEXT BOOK:
1 Stefanie Dengler, Paul Rusch, Helen Schmitz, Tanja Sieber, “Netzwerk Deutsch als Fremdsprache A1–ursbuch,
Arbeitsbuch und Glossar with 2 CDs”, Goyal Publishers, Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1 https://ocw.mit.edu – Massachusetts Institute of Technology Open Courseware
2 https://www.dw.com/en/learn-german - Deutsche Welle, Geramany’s International Broadcaster

CO1 understand structure of language and introducing each other Remembering (K1)
CO2 understand vocabulary on seasons and basic verbs Understanding (K2)
CO3 ask for directions in a new place and avail transport as required Understanding (K2)
CO4 understand food habits of German and ask for appointments. Understanding (K2)
CO5 learn to socialize in a German speaking country Understanding (K2)

CO1 1 1 3 3
CO2 1 1 3 3
CO3 1 1 3 3
CO4 1 1 3 3
CO5 1 1 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 75 25 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 25 75 100
* +3% may be varied (CAT 1,2,3 – 50 marks & ESE – 100 marks)
20GEO02 - JAPANESE LANGUAGE LEVEL 1
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Nil 5/6/7/8 HS 4 0 0 4
Preamble The basic level of Japanese which provides understanding of Hiragana, Katakana and 55 Kanjis also
enables one to greet, introduce oneself and other person and also provides the ability to understand
basic day to day conversations
Unit - I Introduction to Hiragana and Katakana: 12
Chart 1, Chart 2, Chart 3, Annexures 1 and 2 and basic Japanese rules along with similar sounded vocabularies for
each chart.
Unit - II Introduction to Nouns, various particles and usages: 12
Forming simple sentences, asking questions, positioning differentiation and owning fundamentals – new particles
and usages
Unit - III Introduction of Verbs, time and place markers: 12
Usage of action words in sentences and framing them – place and time markers usages – giving and receiving –
omission of certain particles in a sentence.
Unit - IV Introduction of Adjectives, Adverbs and usages: 12
Describing nouns and verbs and framing them to relate day to day conversations- positive and negative ending of
the same – introduction of the likes and dislikes expressions
Unit - V Introduction to Counters and Kanji: 12
How to use numbers-How to use quantifiers-Present form of adjectives and Nouns-Other necessary particles-How to
use numbers and quantifiers – 55 kanji characters
Total: 60
TEXT BOOK:
1. “MINNA NO NIHONGO–Japanese for Everyone”, 2nd Edition, Goyal Publishers & Distributors Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Margherita Pezzopane, “Try N5”, 2nd Edition, Tankobon Softcover, Japan, 2017.
2. Sayaka Kurashina, “Japanese Word Speedmaster”, 2nd Edition, Tankobon Softcover, Japan, 2018.

CO1 read and understand typical expression in Hiragana and Katakana Remembering (K1)
CO2 greet and introduce oneself and other Understanding (K2)
CO3 communicate day to day conversations – basic level Understanding (K2)
CO4 understand the Kanjis in Japanese Script Understanding (K2)
CO5 comprehend concept of numbers, days, months, time and counters Understanding (K2)

CO1 1 2 3 3
CO2 1 2 3 3
CO3 1 2 3 3
CO4 1 2 3 3
CO5 1 2 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 75 25 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 25 75 100
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites German Language Level 1 5/6/7/8 HS 4 0 0 4
Preamble This course aims to help the learner to acquire the vocabulary as per the Common European framework
of German language A1 level competence. This course will help to assimilate the basic grammar
structures and gain vocabulary to understand and reciprocate in daily life situations on a broader sense.
A thorough learner will be able to gain a comprehensive understanding of the German grammar and
confidently articulate in day today situations.
Unit - I Contacts(Kontakte): 12
Understanding Letters, simple instructions, speaking about language learning, finding specific information in text,
Acknowledging the theme and understanding conversations, Making appointments. Grammar – Preposition with
Dative, Articles in Dative and Accusative possessive articles.
Unit - II Accomodation(Die Wohnung): 12
Understanding Accommodation advertisements, describing accommodation and directions, responding to an
invitation, Expressing feelings, Colours. Grammar – Adjective with to be verb, Adjective with sehr/zu, Adjective with
Accusative, prepositions with Dative
Unit - III Are you Working?(Arbeiten Sie): 12
Daily Schedule, speaking about past, understanding Job openings advertisements, Opinions, Telephonic
conversations, Speaking about Jobs. Grammar – Perfect tense, Participle II – regular and irregular verbs,
Conjunctions – und, oder, aber.
Unit - IV Clothes and Style(Kleidung und mode): 12
Clothes, Chats on shopping clothes, reporting on past, Orienting oneself in Supermarkets, Information and research
about Berlin. Grammar – Interrogative articles and Demonstrative articles, Partizip II – separable and non-separable
verbs, Personal pronouns in Dative, Verbs with Dative
Unit - V Health and Vacation(Gesundheit und Urlaub): 12
Personal information, Human Body parts, Sports, Understanding instructions and prompts, health tips. Grammar –
Imperative with du/Ihr, Modal verbs – sollen, müssen, nicht dürfen, dürfen. Suggestions for travel, Path, Postcards,
weather, Travel reports, Problems in hotel, Tourist destinations. Grammar – Pronoun: man, Question words – Wer,
Wen, Was, Wem, Adverbs – Zuerst, dann, Später, Zum Schl
Total: 60
TEXT BOOK:
1 Stefanie Dengler, Paul Rusch, Helen Schmitz, Tanja Sieber, “Netzwerk Deutsch als Fremdsprache A1–ursbuch,
REFERENCES:
1 https://ocw.mit.edu – Massachusetts Institute of Technology Open Courseware
2 https://www.dw.com/en/learn-german - Deutsche Welle , Geramany’s International Broadcaster

CO1 understand letters and simple texts Remembering (K1)
CO2 assimilate vocabulary on Accommodation and invitation Understanding (K2)
CO3 comprehend concept of time, telephonic conversation and job-related information Understanding (K2)
CO4 understand how to do shopping in a German store Understanding (K2)
CO5 understand body parts and how to plan personal travel Understanding (K2)

CO1 1 1 3 3
CO2 1 1 3 3
CO3 1 1 3 3
CO4 1 1 3 3
CO5 1 1 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 75 25 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 25 75 100
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course provides enriching information about various everyday situations in personal and
professional life and enhances the vocabulary and speaking ability to respond to and also seek
information in those situations. It also equips one to express opinions and negotiate appointments. With
diligent learning one can capture all basic grammatical structure to answer confidently in everyday
situations.
Unit - I All about food (Rund Ums Essen): 9
Understand information about person, Speak about food, Introduce self and others, Understand and explain a
picture base story, To justify something, To speak about feelings, To express opinions, To answer questions on a
text, To describe a restaurant. Grammar: Possessive Articles in Dative, Yes/No questions, Reflexive verbs,
Sentence with ‘weil’
Unit - II School days ( Nach der Schulzeit): 9
Understand School reports, Speak and write comments about schooldays, To speak about habits, Understand and
provide City-Tipps, To Understand School types in Germany and speak about it. Grammar: Modal verbs in Past
tense, Positional Verbs, Two-way prepositions in Dativ and Akkusativ.
Unit - III Media in everyday life (Medien in Alltag): 9
To speak about advantages and disadvantages of Media, formulate comparisons, Express your own opinion, Talk
about Movies, Understand and Write Movie reviews. Grammar: Comparative degree, Comparative Sentences with
‘Als’ and ‘Wie’, Subordinate clause with ‘dass’, Superlative degree.
Unit - IV Feelings and expressions (Gefühle): 9
Express thanks and congratulations, Talk about feelings, To understand information about festivals and speak about
it, To describe a city, Express joy and regrets, Understand and write Blog entries, Write appropriate heading.
Grammar: Subordinate Clause with ‘Wenn’, Adjectives to be used along with definite articles.
Unit - V Profession and Travel ( Beruf und Reisen): 9
To have a conversation at ticket counter, To talk about leisure activities, To gather information from Texts, Introduce
people, Express career preferences, Ideate the dream job, To prepare and make telephone calls, To understand
text about Workplace. Ask for information, Express uncertainty, Understand and give directions, Understand a
newspaper article, Say your own opinion, Talk about the way to work, Describe a statistic, Understand information
about a trip, Talk about travel. Grammar: Adjective to be used along with indefinite articles, Prepositions, verb –
‘werden’, Subordinate clause – indirect questions, All units will include elements for reading, writing, speaking and
listening.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Stefanie Dengler, Paul Rusch, Helen Schmitz, Tanja Sieber, “Netzwerk Deutsch als Fremdsprache A1–ursbuch,
REFERENCES:
1. Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza , Eduard von Jan, Till Schonherr, “Tangram 2 (German)” , Goyal Publishers, Delhi,
2011.
2. https://www.dw.com/en/learn-german - Deutsche Welle , Geramany’s International Broadcaster

CO1 understand German food style, restaurant and be able express oneself. Remembering (K1)
CO2 understand German school system and discuss about habits and provide City-Tipps. Understanding (K2)
CO3 analyze and compare media in everyday life. Understanding (K2)
CO4 express feelings, describe a city and write blog entries. Understanding (K2)
CO5 seek and provide information in a professional setup, give directions to others and talk Understanding (K2)
about travel.

CO1 1 1 3 3
CO2 1 1 3 3
CO3 1 1 3 3
CO4 1 1 3 3
CO5 1 1 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 75 25 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 25 75 100
Programme &
Branch
Preamble This course imparts knowledge about interacting with external world, understanding various cultural
aspects, behaviour and addressing relationships in personal and professional front. It helps one to
understand reports from various media and at work. Enhance learner’s grammatical exposure and cover
the core basic grammatical concepts which would lay the foundation to have a better hold of the
language. With focused learning one should be able to read and respond to reports, write simple formal
and informal letters and text messages and be able to engage in simple conversations in known
situations.
Unit - I Learning (Lernen): 9
Understanding and describing learning problems, Understanding and giving advice, Giving reasons, Understanding
reports about everyday work life, Talking about everyday working life, Understanding a radio report, Understanding
and making a mini-presentation. Grammar: Conjunctions- denn,weil, Konjuntiv II: Sollte( suggestions), Genitive,
Temporal prepositions – bis, über + Akkusativ,ab+dativ
Unit - II Athletic (Sportlich): 9
Expressing enthusiasm, hope, disappointment, Understanding and writing fan comments, Formulating follow-ups,
Making suggestions and reacting, Making an appointment, Understanding a report about an excursion,
Understanding difficult texts, Introducing a tourist attraction. Grammar: Conjunctions – deshalb, trotzdem, Verbs
with Dativ and Akkusativ
Unit - III Living Together (Zusammen Leben): 9

To complain, apologize & give in, As for something, Understand experience reports, Report on the past, Talk about
pets, Respond to information, Write and correct a story. Grammatik: Konjunctiv II- könnte, Subordinate clauses –
als and Wenn.
Unit – IV Good Entertainment (Gute Unterhaltung): 9
Talk about music style, Buy concert tickets, Introduce a musician / band, Understand newspaper reports, Give more
detailed information about a person, Understand information about painting, Understand description of a picture,
Describe a picture. Grammatik: Interrogative Articles: Was fuer eine? , Pronouns – man/jemand/niemand and
alles/etwas/nichts , Relative sentences in Nominativ.
Unit - V Passage of time and Culture (Zeitablauf & Kultur): 9

Talk about wishes, Express wishes, Give Suggestions, Understand a conversation, Plan something together, To ask
others something, Understand a text, Exchange information, Talk about proverbs, write a story. Understand
information about other cultures, Discuss about behavior, Express intentions, Use the appropriate salutation,
Understand tips in a text, Talk about forms of addressing others, Give more information, Discuss about clichés and
write about them. All units will include elements for reading, writing, speaking and listening. Grammatik: Konjunctiv
II (Wishes, Suggestions), Verbs with prepositions, W- questions with prepositions, Relative sentences in Akkusativ,
Subordinate clauses with damit and Um…Zu.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
1. Stefanie Dengler, Paul Rusch, Helen Schmitz, Tanja Sieber, “Netzwerk Deutsch als Fremdsprache A1–ursbuch,
Arbeitsbuch”, Goyal Publishers, Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza, Eduard von Jan, Till Schonherr, “Tangram 2 (German)”, Goyal Publishers, Delhi,
2011.
2. https://www.dw.com/en/learn-german - Deutsche Welle, Geramany’s International Broadcaster

CO1 leverage learning in Workplace, understanding reports and make presentation. Remembering (K1)
CO2 reciprocate to different situations, make appointment and understand texts. Understanding (K2)
CO3 handle relationships and respond appropriately to exchange information Understanding (K2)
CO4 familiarize to various channels of entertainment Understanding (K2)
CO5 know about various cultural aspects, usage of proverbs and cliches. Understanding (K2)

CO1 1 1 3 3
CO2 1 1 3 3
CO3 1 1 3 3
CO4 1 1 3 3
CO5 1 1 3 3
Total %
Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) %
CAT1 75 25 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 25 75 100
Programme &
Branch
Prerequisites Japanese Language Level 1 5/6/7/8 HS 4 0 0 4
Preamble The basic level of Japanese which provides understanding of Hiragana, Katakana and 110 Kanjis and
provides the ability to understand basic conversations and also enables one to request other person and
also understand Casual form
Unit - I Introduction to groups of verbs: 12
tai form-Verb groups-te form-Give and ask permission to do an action-Present continuous form-Restrict other person
from doing an action-nouns-Basic Questions
Unit - II Introduction to Casual Form: 12
nai form-Dictionary form-ta form-Polite style and Casual style differences-Conversation in plain style-Place of usage
of Polite style and Casual style
Unit - III Express opinions and thoughts: 12
Introduction to new particle-Express someone one’s thought-Convey the message of one person to another-Ask
someone if something is right -Noun modifications
Unit - IV Introduction to If clause and remaining Kanjis: 12
If clause tara form-Express gratitude for an action done by other person-Hypothetical situation-Particles to use in
case of Motion verbs-50 Kanjis
Unit - V Introduction to giving and receiving with te form and “when, even if” usages: 12
Providing to and getting from differences - Understanding of situations and framing sentences using when and even
if..etc.
Total: 60
TEXT BOOK:
Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES:

CO1 differentiate groups of verbs and its forms Remembering (K1)
CO2 understand Polite form and Casual form of Japanese Understanding (K2)
CO3 comprehend personal communication and express greetings Understanding (K2)
CO4 understand the Kanjis in Japanese Script and If clause Understanding (K2)
CO5 comprehend concept of “even if”, “when” and job-related information Understanding (K2)

CO1 1 2 3 3
CO2 1 2 3 3
CO3 1 2 3 3
CO4 1 2 3 3
CO5 1 2 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 75 25 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 25 75 100
Programme &
Branch
Preamble The intermediate level of Japanese which provides understanding of all forms ofverbs, adverbs,
conjunctions, etc. which includes 150 Kanji’s and provides the ability to comprehend conversations
encountered in daily life
Unit - I Introduction to Potential verbs: 9
Causes and Reasons-Favouring Expressions-Expressing a State-Potential Verb Sentences-Simultaneous actions-
Verb Groups-te Form-Customary Actions-Nouns-Basic Questions and Kanji’s.
Unit - II Introduction to Transitive and Intransitive verbs: 9
Consequence of verbs- Embarrassment about Facts- Consequence of Verbs with an Intentions-Affirmative
Sentences- Conjunctions-Basic Questions and kanji’s.
Unit - III Introduction to Volitional forms: 9
Expressions of Speakers Intention-Expressing Suggestion or Advice-Usage of Adverbs and Quantifiers-Basic
Questions and kanji’s.
Unit - IV Introduction to Imperative and Prohibitive verbs: 9
Commanding person- Interrogatives-Expressions of Third Person-Actions and its Occurrence - Possibilities of an
Action-Changing of States Basic Questions and Kanji’s.
Unit - V Introduction to Conditional form and Passive verbs: 9
Description of Requirement and Speaker’s Judgement, HabitualActions, Directions and suggestions-Passive forms
of Verbs-Basic Questions and Kanji’s.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES:

CO1 read and understand BasicVocabularies. Remembering (K1)
CO2 understand Conversations used in daily life. Understanding (K2)
CO3 comprehend personal communication and express greetings. Understanding (K2)
CO4 understand the Kanji’s in Japanese Script. Understanding (K2)
CO5 comprehend Coherent conversations in everyday situations. Understanding (K2)

CO1 1 2 3 3
CO2 1 2 3 3
CO3 1 2 3 3
CO4 1 2 3 3
CO5 1 2 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 75 25 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 25 75 100
20GEO10 -JAPANESE LANGUAGE LEVEL 4
Programme &
Branch
Preamble The intermediate level of Japanese provides understanding of expressions of verbs, its pattern,
Relationships which also includes 150 Kanji’s and also provides the ability to understand relationship
among the people.
Unit - I Introduction to Reasoning: 9
Causes and Sequences-Causes and Effects-Interrogative Patterns-Adjective as a Noun -Basic Questions and
Kanji’s.
Unit - II Introduction to Exchanging of things: 9
Expressions for Giving and Receiving of Things-Polite Expression of Request-Indicating a Purpose of Actions-Basic
Quantifiers-Basic Questions and kanji’s.
Unit - III Introduction to States of an Action: 9
Sentence Pattern to Indicate Appearance-Degree of Action and State-Adjectives as Adverbs- Convey information -
Basic Questions and kanji’s.
Unit - IV Introduction to Causative Verbs: 9
Causative Forms of Verbs-Asking Opportunity to do something-Hypothetical Questions-Judgement and Course of
an actions-Basic Questions and Kanji’s.
Unit - V Introduction to Relationship in Social Status: 9
Honorific expressions- Respectful expressions- Humble expressions-Polite expressions-Basic Questions and
Kanji’s.
Total: 45
TEXT BOOK:
Delhi, 2017.
REFERENCES:

CO1 read and Understand Relationship of a Person. Remembering (K1)
CO2 understand Conversations Used in Everyday Activities. Understanding (K2)
CO3 comprehend Contents at Near Natural Speed. Understanding (K2)
CO4 understand the Kanji’s in Japanese Script. Understanding (K2)
CO5 comprehend Orally Presented Materials. Understanding (K2)

CO1 1 2 3 3
CO2 1 2 3 3
CO3 1 2 3 3
CO4 1 2 3 3
CO5 1 2 3 3

Category* (K1) % (K2) % (K3) % (K4) % (K5) % (K6) % %
CAT1 75 25 100
CAT2 25 75 100
CAT3 25 75 100
ESE 25 75 100

Kec r2020 Ece

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kec r2020 Ece

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kec r2020 Ece

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kongu Engineering College, Perundurai, Erode – 638060, India

KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE

REGULATIONS, CURRICULUM & SYLLABI - 2020

BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING DEGREE

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND

1 VISION AND MISSION OF THE INSTITUTE 3

3 VISION AND MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT 3

4 PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) 3

5 PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs) 4

6 PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs) 5

8 CURRICULUM BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE 27

11 MAPPING OF COURSES WITH PROGRAM OUTCOMES 39

CURRICULUM OF BE – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

MAPPING OF MISSION STATEMENTS (MS) WITH PEOs

MS\PEO PEO1 PEO2 PEO3

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

MAPPING OF PEOs WITH POs AND PSOs

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM AND OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION

BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (BE) / BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY (BTech)

1. DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATU

In these Regulations, unless otherwise specified:

i. “University” means ANNA UNIVERSITY, Chennai.

ii. “College” means KONGU ENGINEERING COLLEGE.

iii. “Programme” means Bachelor of Engineering (BE) / Bachelor of Technology (BTech)

ix. “Principal” means Chairman, Academic Council of the College.

x. “Controller of Examinations” means authorized person who is responsible for all

2. PROGRAMMES AND BRANCHES OF STUDY

3.2 Lateral Entry Admission

4.3 Employability Enhancement Courses

4.5 Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses

5. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

5.1 A candidate is normally expected to complete the BE / BTech Degree programme in

7. ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION PROCEDURE FOR AWARDING MARKS

Sl. Continuous End Semester

2. Theory cum Practical The distribution of marks shall be

3. Professional Skills Training / / 100 ---

5. Value Added Course The distribution ---

7.3 Theory Courses

Continuous Assessment End Semester Examination

7.9 Comprehensive Test/Viva

7.10 Entrepreneurships/ Start ups

7.13 Online Course

7.14 Self Study Course

8.1.5 Candidate’s progress is satisfactory.

9. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

10. PROVISION FOR WITHDRAWAL FROM EXAMINATIONS

11. PROVISION FOR BREAK OF STUDY

12. PASSING REQUIREMENTS

14. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION

16. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE

17.5 Honours Degree:

18. MALPRACTICES IN TESTS AND EXAMINATIONS

CURRICULUM BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE (for 2020-21 / 2021-22 batches of students)

Summary of Credit Distribution

1. 20EGT11 English Language Skills 3 0 0 3 I

2. 20EGT21 Advanced Communication Skills 3 0 0 3 II